JP2019209029A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To excellently provide a wiring pattern.SOLUTION: A game machine has a substrate which mounts at least a specific electronic component having a metal fixing part and in which wiring patterns for electrically connecting respective electronic components to be mounted, forms a component fixing part for fixing the metal fixing part by a low-temperature molten metal, and the component fixing part is electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns. The game machine is provided with: prescribed performance means capable of executing a series of prescribed performance; and suggestive performance means capable of executing suggestive performance displaying a plurality of suggestive images during the prescribed performance and suggesting the advantageous degree advantageous to a player. The game machine can display a plurality of suggestive images different in advantageous degree suggested and in kind to a position where they overlap with each other in accordance with the kind of suggestive images and, displays a second suggestive image more preferentially than a first suggestive image when the first suggestive image and the second suggestive image of a greater advantageous degree suggested than the first suggestive image are displayed at a position where they can overlap.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 21

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  Conventionally, a connector which is an electronic component having a metal fixing portion is surface-mounted on a component fixing portion on a substrate, and the metal fixing portion is soldered to the component fixing portion, so that the connector which is an electronic component is firmly fixed. There are gaming machines on which electronic boards are mounted (see, for example, Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2).

JP-A-9-75509 JP 2009-66081 A

  However, in Patent Documents 1 and 2, if the connection strength between the connector, which is an electronic component to be mounted, and the board is low, the connector is dropped from the board due to the load applied to the connector due to insertion / extraction, resulting in poor connection. If the area of the component fixing part is increased to increase the connection strength between these connectors and the board, other wiring patterns, particularly, a GND pattern that needs to obtain a large capacity should be provided satisfactorily. There was a problem that would be impossible.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a board on which a wiring pattern can be satisfactorily provided while securing the area of a component fixing portion. .

In order to solve the above-described problem, the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), and includes a metal fixing unit (for example, a metal fixing unit 651). A specific electronic component (for example, a connector) having at least a substrate (for example, an LED substrate 275) on which a wiring pattern for electrically connecting the mounted electronic components is formed;
A component fixing portion (for example, a fixing pad P) for fixing the metal fixing portion with a low-temperature molten metal (for example, solder) is formed on the substrate, and the component fixing portion has the wiring pattern ( For example, a predetermined effect means that is electrically connected to any one of the GND patterns) and that can execute a series of predetermined effects (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control that can execute a series of battle effects), the predetermined effects. A suggestion effect means capable of displaying a plurality of suggestion images during execution of the game and performing a suggestion effect suggesting an advantageous degree advantageous to the player (for example, displaying a plurality of hit telop images during execution of the battle effect) And the effect control CPU 120 that can execute the effect during the battle suggesting the big hit reliability, etc., and the suggested degree of advantage differs depending on the type of the suggested image (for example, life Depending on the type of telop image, the suggested jackpot reliability may be different, and a plurality of different types of suggestion images can be displayed at positions where they can be superimposed on each other (for example, a plurality of hit types having different types The telop images can be displayed at positions where they can overlap each other), and the first suggestion image and the second suggestion image having a higher degree of advantage suggested than the first suggestion image are displayed at positions where they can overlap each other. The second suggestion image is preferentially displayed over the first suggestion image (for example, the big hit than the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” And the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!”) When the high-reliability “GREAT!” Hit telop image 63SHTC is displayed at a position where it can overlap with each other, the “HIT!” Hit telop image 63SHT On the front side than the, it displays a duplicate hit for telop image 63SHTC of "GREAT !!", etc.). It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the component fixing portion can be formed as a part of the wiring pattern, it is not necessary to provide the component fixing portion separately from the wiring pattern, so that the wiring pattern can be secured while securing the area of the fixing portion. Can be provided satisfactorily. In addition, during the execution of a series of predetermined effects, a plurality of suggested images can be displayed, and an suggested effect that suggests an advantageous degree that is advantageous to the player can be executed. However, it is possible to improve the interest more. In addition, according to such a configuration, a plurality of different suggestion images can be displayed at positions where they can be superimposed on each other, and the first suggestion image and the first suggestion having a higher degree of advantage than the first suggestion image are displayed. When the second suggestion image is displayed at a position where the two suggestion images can be superimposed on each other, the second suggestion image is preferentially displayed over the first suggestion image, and therefore, the second suggestion has a higher degree of advantage suggested than the first suggestion image. The visibility of the image can be prevented from being hindered, the impression of the second suggestion image is increased, and a more effective suggestion effect can be obtained.

A gaming machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1, wherein the board corresponds to a plurality (for example, two) of the metal fixing portions of the electronic component (for example, two (for example, two)). Two component fixing portions are formed, and each component fixing portion is electrically connected to the wiring pattern (in FIG. 24, two metal fixing portions 651 have two corresponding to each of them. The portion is soldered to the fixed pad P).
According to this feature, since the electronic component is fixed by the plurality of component fixing portions, the occupation area of one component fixing portion can be suppressed, the degree of freedom of wiring can be increased, and the electronic component can be connected via the electronic component. It is also possible to prevent the applied load from being concentrated on one component fixing portion.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2, wherein the wiring pattern to which the component fixing portion is electrically connected is a ground (GND) pattern.
According to this feature, the area of the component fixing portion can be secured while securing the capacity of the ground (GND) pattern.

A gaming machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 3, wherein at least the specific electronic component has a fixed pad portion formed on the surface as the component fixing portion. It is mounted on a substrate by surface mounting (for example, the connector 650 is mounted on a surface mounting type LED substrate 275 in which the fixed pad P is formed on the component mounting surface).
According to this feature, the component fixing portion can be formed on the substrate surface, and the wiring pattern can be formed inside the substrate corresponding to the component fixing portion. Can do.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 4, wherein the board has a through hole in the fixed pad portion, and is electrically connected to a wiring pattern other than the board surface through the through hole. (For example, in paragraph 0250, it is described that a through hole may be provided in the fixed pad P and connected to the solder surface or the GND pattern in the substrate).
According to this feature, since the through hole can be formed in the fixed pad portion forming the wiring pattern, the occupied area of the through hole can be suppressed as compared with the case where the through hole is individually formed.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

Moreover, the form for implementing invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the following means 6-12. Conventionally, as shown in JP-A-2015-093049 in gaming machines,
There is known a gaming machine capable of executing an effect of displaying a plurality of images during execution of a series of predetermined effects. For example, a pachinko gaming machine that can execute an effect of displaying a plurality of effect images during execution of a series of effect button operation trigger effects is known. However, as an effect of displaying a plurality of images during the execution of a series of predetermined effects, it is required to execute more effective effects while improving interest. In view of this point, there is a demand for the provision of gaming machines aimed at improving entertainment.

  In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to means 6 of the present invention is a gaming machine according to another aspect capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), and a series of predetermined Predetermined effect means capable of executing an effect (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control capable of executing a series of battle effects), and a degree of advantage that is advantageous to the player by displaying a plurality of suggestion images during the execution of the predetermined effect. Suggesting effect means capable of executing the suggesting effect that suggests (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control capable of executing the during-battle effect suggesting the big hit reliability by displaying a plurality of hit telop images during execution of the battle effect, etc. ), The degree of advantage suggested varies depending on the type of the suggested image (for example, the suggested jackpot reliability varies depending on the type of the hit telop image), and the number of types different The suggestion images can be displayed at positions where they can be superimposed on each other (for example, a plurality of hit telop images of different types can be displayed at positions where they can overlap each other), the first suggestion image, and the first When the second suggestion image having a higher degree of advantage suggested than the suggestion image is displayed at a position where the second suggestion image can be superimposed on each other, the second suggestion image is displayed with priority over the first suggestion image (for example, “ "HIT!" Hit telop image 63SHTB and "HIT!" Hit telop image 63SHTB, which has a higher hit reliability than "HIT!" Hit telop image 63SHTC, are displayed at positions that can overlap each other. In this case, the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” is displayed in front of the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!”. Etc.).

  According to such a configuration, during the execution of a series of predetermined effects, it is possible to display a plurality of suggestion images and perform an suggestion effect that suggests the degree of advantage that is advantageous to the player, depending on the type of the suggestion image Since the suggested degree of advantage is different, the interest can be further improved. In addition, according to such a configuration, a plurality of different suggestion images can be displayed at positions where they can be superimposed on each other, and the first suggestion image and the first suggestion having a higher degree of advantage than the first suggestion image are displayed. When the second suggestion image is displayed at a position where the two suggestion images can be superimposed on each other, the second suggestion image is preferentially displayed over the first suggestion image, and therefore, the second suggestion has a higher degree of advantage suggested than the first suggestion image. The visibility of the image can be prevented from being disturbed, the impression of the second suggestion image is increased, and a more effective suggestion effect can be obtained.

  The gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine according to means 6, wherein when the suggestion image is erased, an erasure effect means (for example, a hit telop image that can execute an erasure effect that changes the mode of the suggestion image) An effect control CPU 120 that can execute an erasing effect that gradually reduces the size of the image, and when the erasing effect for the second suggestion image is being executed, the second suggestion image When the first suggestion image is displayed at a position where the first suggestion image is superimposed, the first suggestion image may be displayed with priority over the second suggestion image (for example, the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!”). When the erasing effect is executed, the hit telop image 63SH of “HIT!” Is overlapped with the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!”. If you want to display a B, on the front side than the hit for the ticker image 63SHTC of "GREAT !!", it can be displayed by overlapping the hit for the ticker image 63SHTB of "HIT!", Etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an excessive restriction on displaying the first suggestion image.

  The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 6 to 7, wherein a third suggestion image that is superimposed on both the first suggestion image and the second suggestion image can be displayed. (For example, it is possible to display the hit telop image 63SHTD of “EXCELLENT !!!” superimposed on both the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” And the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!”. Etc.)

  According to such a configuration, variations in how the suggested image is seen in the suggestive effect are enriched, and the interest can be further improved.

  The gaming machine of the means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 6 to 8, and may further include a specific effect means capable of executing a specific effect in response to the display of the suggestion image. (For example, an effect control CPU 120 that can display an effect image and output a sound effect in response to the display of a hit telop image).

  According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be further increased.

  The gaming machine of the means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 6 to 9, and the display period until the suggestion image is erased may differ depending on the type of the suggestion image ( For example, the display period until the hit telop image is erased differs depending on the type of the hit telop image).

  According to such a configuration, the suggestion image can be erased at a timing according to the type of the suggestion image.

  The gaming machine of the means 11 is a gaming machine according to any one of the means 6 to 10, and is a detecting means capable of detecting a player's operation (for example, a push capable of detecting a player's operation on the push button 31B). Sensor 35B, etc.) may be provided, and the suggestion image of the type determined by the lottery may be displayed in response to the detection of the player's movement (for example, the player's operation on the push button 31B is detected). In response to this, the type of hit telop image determined by lottery can be displayed).

  According to such a configuration, the first image is displayed in the second suggestion image that has a higher degree of advantage suggested than the first suggestion image in an effect that does not know which type of suggestion image is displayed at which timing. Since they are not superimposed, a more effective performance can be executed.

  The gaming machine of means 12 is the gaming machine according to any of means 6 to means 11, and when the same type of suggestion images can be superimposed on each other, it is displayed after the suggestion image that is displayed first. The suggestion image may be preferentially displayed (for example, when the same type of hit telop images are superimposed on each other, the hit telop image displayed later in front of the hit telop image displayed first is displayed. Etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent unnecessary restrictions from being applied when displaying the same type of suggestion image.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the game machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. The front view of a production | presentation apparatus ((A) is a figure of an initial state, (B) is a figure of the state which the movable body advanced). FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the effect device viewed from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the effect device viewed from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movable body seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movable body seen from back. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movable body seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movable body seen from the front. (A) is a front view of a movable body (initial state). (B) is a front view of the inside of the movable body from which the decorative body and the like are removed (initial state). (A) is a front view of a movable body (state when the 1st-4th character member moves). (B) is a front view of the inside of the movable body from which a decorative body or the like is removed (a state when the first to fourth character members are moved). It is a figure explaining the relationship between a deformation | transformation of a decorative body, and brightness. It is a figure which shows a LED board, (A) is the perspective view seen from the front, (B) is the top view seen from the arrow B in (A). It is a figure which shows a LED board, (A) is sectional drawing of the cutting line XIVA-XIVA in FIG. 13 (B), (B) is sectional drawing of the cutting line XIVB-XIVB in FIG. 13 (B). It is a figure which shows a LED board, (A) is an enlarged view of "XVA part" in FIG. 13 (A), (B) is sectional drawing seen from the arrow B in (A), (C) is (A The sectional view seen from arrow C in the middle. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of production. It is a figure which shows the other example of an LED board, (A) is a top view, (B) is sectional drawing of the cutting line BB in (A). It is a figure which shows the other example of an LED board, (A) is sectional drawing of the cutting line XVIIIA-XVIIIA in FIG. 17 (A), (B) is an enlarged view of the "B section" in (A). It is a figure for demonstrating the other example of an LED board, (A) is the figure which has arrange | positioned electronic components without considering the curvature of a board | substrate body, (B) is arrangement | positioning of electronic components from the arrangement | positioning of (A), etc. Figure changed. It is a front view which shows the state which removed the cover body from the movable body. It is detail drawing which shows the LED board provided in the inside of a movable body. It is a figure which shows the allocation form of the signal after the improvement used for this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the allocation form of the signal before improvement. (A), (b) is a perspective view which shows the connector and mounting electrode which are mounted in the component mounting surface of FIG. 21 (A). (A), (b) is a perspective view which shows the other shape of the connector mounted in the component mounting surface of FIG. 21 (A). It is a figure which shows the circuit structure as the modification 12 of this invention. (A) is a front view which shows a 1st production body, (B) is a rear view. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the 1st production body from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the 1st production body from diagonally back. It is AA sectional drawing of FIG. 27 (A). It is BB sectional drawing of FIG. 27 (A). It is CC sectional drawing of FIG.27 (B). It is DD sectional drawing of FIG. 27 (B). (A) is a rear view showing the light emission mode of the first effector, (B) is a front view showing the positional relationship between the first effector and the second effector, and (C) is the first effector and the second effector. It is a schematic plan view which shows the positional relationship with a body. (A) is a principal part front view which shows the state which looked at the 1st production body through the game board, (B) is a figure which shows the principal part of a board | substrate. It is EE sectional drawing of FIG. 33 (B). (A) is a figure which shows the wiring connection state of an LED board and an effect control board, (B) is a figure which shows the wiring connection state of the LED board as a modification 13 of this invention, and an effect control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd initialization process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of operation control at the time of non-detection, operation control at the time of detection, and operation control for actual operation confirmation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation speed example of operation control at the time of non-detection, operation control at the time of detection, and operation control for real operation confirmation. It is a figure for demonstrating the circuit structure of a shielding unit control board. It is a figure for demonstrating the circuit structure of the shielding unit control board in the modification 15. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the circuit structure of the shielding unit control board in the modification 16. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the circuit structure of the shielding unit control board in the modification 17. FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure for demonstrating a series of battle productions. It is a figure which shows an example of a hit telop image. It is a figure which shows the example operation effect of an erasing effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the production | presentation accompanying the display of the hit telop image. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect process during battle. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the kind of hit telop image. It is a figure which shows an example of the display position which can display a hit telop image. It is a figure which shows the example operation effect of the effect during battle. It is a figure which shows the example operation effect of the effect during battle. It is a figure which shows the example operation effect of the effect during battle. It is a figure which shows the example operation effect of the effect during battle. It is a figure which shows the example operation effect of the effect during battle. It is a figure which shows the example operation effect of the effect during battle. It is a figure which shows the example operation effect of the effect during battle.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area 10 is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting ball emitting device. Further, the gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the gaming area 10 can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area 10 can be seen through the glass window 50a.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is formed in a substantially square shape in front view using a synthetic resin material having translucency such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin, etc., and an obstruction nail ( (Not shown), a board surface plate 2A provided with guide rails 2b and the like, and a spacer member 2B attached integrally to the back surface side of the board surface plate 2A. The game board 2 is configured in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front by a non-light-transmitting member such as a plywood board, and is a board surface board provided with obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 2b, etc. on the front game board surface. It may be configured.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. These consist of 7-segment LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like, and special symbols may be numbers such as “0” to “9” or lighting patterns such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  Note that “variable display” of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are changed (displayed in a variable manner) by update display or the like (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (variable display result) (also referred to as a derivation display) (the same applies to other variable displays described later). Note that scroll display, deformation, enlargement / reduction, and the like may be performed as variations in symbols (in particular, decorative symbols described later).

  In the following, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is "second special symbol". Also called. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”.

  An effect display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The effect display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. The effect display device 5 is disposed on the back side of the game board 2 and can be visually recognized through an opening 2 c formed in the game board 2. Note that a frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2 c in the game board 2.

  On the screen of the effect display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, a variety of decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as different types of ornament identification information different from the special symbols are variable. Display is performed. As an example, on the screen of the effect display device 5, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are synchronized with the first special game or the second special game. , Variable display of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display or update display) is performed.

  On the screen of the effect display device 5, a display area 5H is also arranged. In the display area 5H, a first hold display image (here, a circle image) corresponding to the first special figure game (variable display of decorative symbols) for which execution is suspended is displayed right-justified and execution is suspended. A second reserved display image (here, a circle image) corresponding to the second special-figure game (variable display of decorative symbols) being displayed is displayed left-justified.

  Note that the number of special figure games held is also referred to as a special figure holding memory number. In particular, the number of holds of the first special figure game is referred to as a first special figure hold memory number. The number of holds of the second special figure game is referred to as the second special figure hold memory number. The number of first reserved display images indicates the first special figure reserved memory number, and the number of second reserved display images indicates the second special figure reserved memory number. The first hold display image and the second hold display image may be collectively referred to as a hold display image.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B includes a plurality of LEDs, and displays the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number depending on the number of LEDs lit. To do.

  Below the effect display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, the first start port switch 22A (see FIG. 2) is turned on, thereby detecting the entry of the game ball (at this time, a predetermined number (for example, three) ) And the first special figure game can be started.)

  The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes a normal electric accessory having a movable plate that is changed between a closed state that is a protruding position and an open state that is a retracted position by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). A second start winning opening is formed. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, for example, when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable plate moves to the protruding position, so that the movable plate protrudes toward the game area 10, and the game ball enters the second start winning opening. (The second start winning opening is also said to be closed). On the other hand, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an opening that allows the game ball to enter the second start winning opening when the movable plate is in the retreat position where the solenoid 81 is in the ON state. (The second start winning opening is also said to be open). When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, the second start port switch 22B (see FIG. 2) is turned on, thereby detecting the entry of the game ball (at this time, a predetermined number (for example, three) ) And the second special figure game can be started.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2) that is used for the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as an area.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball enters the big winning opening (for example, Cannot pass). On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When a game ball enters the big prize opening, the count switch 23 (see FIG. 2) is turned on, and thereby the entry of the game ball is detected. At this time, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when game balls enter the grand prize winning opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and can display variable symbols of ordinary symbols (also called “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”) as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbols. Do. Such variable display of normal symbols is also referred to as a general game (also referred to as a “normal game”).

  The usual game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the gate switch 21 of FIG. 2 is turned on, and thereby the passage of the game ball is detected.

  On the right side of the normal symbol display 20, a general figure holding display 25C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect effect LED 9 is provided in the periphery of the gaming area. Yes.

  In the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like for launching a game ball as a game medium toward a game area by a hitting ball launching device is provided. Yes.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  An effect device 200 is arranged below the effect display device 5. The effect device 200 can execute an effect by operating in accordance with various effect images such as variable display of identification information or independently. Further, on the left side of the rendering device 200, a first rendering body 800 and a second rendering body 900 disposed on the back side of the first rendering body 800 are provided.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, an LED control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure games and ordinary figure games, management of various starting prizes and various holding memories, lottery lottery and lottery per usual figure Execution, control of a big hit gaming state, transmission of an effect control command to the effect control board 12, and the like, and a function of transmitting an effect control command to the effect control board 12. The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  As an example, the CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to realize the function of the main board 11 (control of the progress of the game). At this time, various data (data such as variation patterns, presentation control commands, various tables) stored in the ROM 101 are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals are input and an output port for transmitting various signals.

  The CPU 103, via the I / O 105, displays the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, and the general drawing hold display. A signal for controlling (driving) the device 25C and the like is output and controlled.

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game media pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and performs various operations based on the received effect control command. Has a function of executing the effect (including variable display of decorative symbols and effect device).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the program stored in the ROM 121, thereby realizing the function of the effect control board 12 (execution of the effect). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data used for the effect control pattern and data such as various tables) are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

  The display control unit 123 outputs a video signal of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), or the like.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (rendering random numbers) used for controlling the rendering operation in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for taking in an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals.

  The sound control board 13 has a function of outputting sound (sound designated by the sound effect signal) from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound effect signal from the effect control board 12.

  The LED control board 14 has a function of turning on / off the lighting LED 9 (turning on / off according to the driving content indicated by the lighting signal) based on the lighting signal from the lighting control board 12.

  The effect display device 5 includes a display panel composed of a liquid crystal panel, an EL panel, and the like, and a driver circuit that drives the display panel. The video signal supplied from the display control unit 123 to the effect display device 5 via the I / O 125 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit displays an image represented by the video signal on the display panel. As a result, various effect images and the like are displayed on the effect display device 5.

  The effect device 200 includes a drive mechanism 210 and a movable body 250, which perform an effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) by exchanging signals (such as control signals and detection signals described later) with the effect control board 12. Controlled by

(Progress of games, production progress, etc.)
A game medium (game ball) is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Progress of games controlled by the main board 11)
When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game (variable display of normal symbols) is started. In addition, when another general game is already being executed, or during the following opening control, the normal game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), and the normal game is limited to 4 etc. Execution is deferred. The held ordinary game is executed when a start condition for starting the ordinary game is satisfied (for example, no other ordinary game is being executed and the release control is not being performed). If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 when the number of stored customary drawings reaches the upper limit value, the number of stored customary drawings is not increased and the passing is invalidated.

  The variable display results that are stopped and displayed in the ordinary game include a symbol per symbol (for example, a common symbol such as “7”) and a common symbol losing symbol (for example, a common symbol such as “−”). . When the symbol per symbol is stopped (derived), the variable display result is “per symbol”. The case where the usual figure losing symbol is stopped (derived) is when the variable display result is “general figure losing”.

  In the case of “per normal”, an opening control (the second start winning opening is opened) is performed in which the movable blade piece of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted for a predetermined period. The opening control is not performed in the case of “ordinary loss”.

  When the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the first special game is started. Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the second special game is started. When the special figure game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another special figure game is already being executed or the game is controlled to the big hit game state described later, each of the four special figure games is four. Execution of the special figure game is suspended with the above as an upper limit. The reserved special figure game is executed when a start condition capable of starting the special figure game is satisfied (other special figure games are not executed and are not in the big hit gaming state, etc.).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning opening when the first special figure reserved memory number reaches the upper limit value, the first special figure reserved memory number does not increase and the entry is invalidated ( There may be a prize ball). When the game ball enters the second start winning opening when the second special figure reserved memory number reaches the upper limit value, the second special figure reserved memory number does not increase and the entry is invalidated ( There may be a prize ball).

  The entry (winning) of a game ball that increases the number of first special figure reserved memories into the first starting winning opening is also referred to as a first starting winning. The entry (winning) of the game ball that increases the second special figure reserved memory number into the second starting winning opening is also referred to as a second starting winning. These winnings are collectively referred to simply as starting winnings.

  The variable display results stopped and displayed in the special figure game include a jackpot symbol (for example, a special symbol such as “3” and “7”) and a lost symbol (for example, a special symbol such as “−”). . When the jackpot symbol is stopped (displayed), the variable display result is “big jackpot”. The lost symbol is stopped (derived) when the variable display result is “lost”.

  When the variable display result of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is “big hit” (specific display result), the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. When the variable display result is “losing”, it is not controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in an open state. The open state is until the earlier timing of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds), the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9), or the like. Will continue. Such an open state is called a round game (also simply called “round”). In the big hit game state, the round game is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “15 times”) is reached (the big prize opening is closed in a period other than the round game).

  In the “big hit”, the big hit types “non-probability change” and “probability change” are set. When the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit symbol “3” is stopped and displayed. When the big hit type is “probability change”, the big hit symbol of “7” is stopped and displayed.

  The “big hit” when the big hit type is “probable change” may be called “probable big hit”, and the “big hit” when the big hit type is “non-probable change” may be called “non-probable big hit”. In addition, the big hit gaming state based on “probability big hit” may be referred to as “probability big hit gaming state”. Further, the big hit gaming state based on the “non-probable big hit game” may be referred to as “non-probable big hit game state”.

  After the probable big hit game state is finished, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” (big hit probability) is controlled to be a probable state in which the probability is higher than the normal state. The probability variation state continues until the next jackpot gaming state is started.

  After the probable big hit game state or the non-probable big hit game state ends, the average variable display time (variable display period) is controlled to be short when the normal state is shorter than the normal state. In the short-time state, one of the end conditions is established first, that is, the predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times) the special game is executed and the next big hit game state is started. Continue until you do.

  In the short-time state, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is opened and closed in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening as compared to the non-short-time state that is not in the short-time state such as the normal state. It may be changed. For example, the control to make the change time of the normal symbol in the normal game (the variable display period of the normal figure, also referred to as the normal change time) shorter than in the normal state, or variable display in each normal game What is necessary is just to change the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode by controlling the probability that the result is “per hit” as compared with the normal state. Such control is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “time reduction control” or “high base control”). By controlling in such a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and the gaming state becomes more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

  The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a gaming state other than a state advantageous for a player such as a short-time state, a probability variation state, etc. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability of “winning” and the probability that the variable display result in the special game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) The state is controlled in the same manner as when a predetermined return process is not executed after the input.

  The short time state is also referred to as “high base”, and the gaming state that is not in the short time state is also referred to as “low base” or “non-short time state”. The probability variation state is also referred to as “high probability”, and the gaming state that is not the probability variation state is also referred to as “low probability”, “non-probability variation”, or the like.

(Progress of game controlled by production control board 12)
In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the effect display device 5, it corresponds to the start of the first special game or the second special game. Then, variable display of decorative symbols (this is also a kind of effect) is started. At the timing when the variable display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special graphic game or the second special graphic game, the fixed decorative pattern (variable display result) becomes a variable decorative display result (variable display result). A combination of three decorative symbols) is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to a decorative design that has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later (“reach variation”). "Design" is also a display mode in which fluctuation continues.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display. As reach production, normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B having different production modes are prepared. In this embodiment, the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of super reach B> super reach A> normal reach.

  The big hit expectation is, for example, the ratio at which the variable display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, and is also the ratio at which the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “big hit”.

  When the variable display result of the special game is “hit”, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 5 as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol. (The display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7” for probability variation big hit, non-probable big hit, on the predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. "6" etc.) are all displayed at the same time.

  When the variable display result is “losing”, the fixed display pattern of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, instead of the variable display mode of the decorative pattern. There is. In addition, when the variable display result is “losing”, after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss combination”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern. ”) May be stopped and displayed.

  When the super reach is performed, an effect using the effect device 200 is executed (details will be described later).

(Director 200)
Next, details of the rendering device 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is the rear (see FIG. 4 and the like). Further, the vertical and horizontal directions as viewed from the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are defined as the vertical and horizontal directions of the effect device 200 as they are (see FIGS. 3 and 4). Moreover, each member which comprises the production | presentation apparatus 200 is formed with the synthetic resin or the metal unless there is particular mention. Moreover, the attachment regarding each member may be performed by an appropriate method, such as attachment using screws, screws, etc., or attachment such as fitting, unless otherwise specified.

  As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the rendering device 200 includes a drive mechanism 210 and a movable body 250. The drive mechanism 210 moves the movable body 250 in the vertical direction. The movable body 250 is decorated with pachinko gaming machine 1 decoration, and the effect can be enhanced by such decoration. The movable body 250 can move upward from the initial position (FIG. 3A) and advance to the advance position (FIG. 3B) by the drive mechanism 210 (return from the advance position to the initial position). Can also). At the initial position of the movable body 250, most of the movable body 250 is located behind a transparent resin cover (not shown) (attached to the game board 2 or the like). It is visually recognized through. On the other hand, the movable body 250 advances to the front of the effect display device 5 by moving to the advance position, and is visually recognized without the resin cover. The game board 2 may be transparent, and the movable body 250 may be positioned behind the game board 2 at least at an initial position and visually recognized via the game board 2.

(Structure of drive mechanism 210, etc.)
First, the drive mechanism 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. The drive mechanism 210 includes a base body 211, a drive motor mounting member 213, a drive motor 215, first to sixth gears 217 to 222, a detection sensor 223, a rotating arm 225, a slide member 227, an elastic body 229, and the like (particularly). , See FIG.

  The base body 211 is a base of the drive mechanism 210 and supports various components. The base body 211 is fixed to the game board 2 or the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A cover body CV (shown only in FIG. 3) that covers the drive motor 215 from the front and hides it from the player is attached to the base body 211. The base body 211 includes supports 211A to 211F, a concave rail 211J, a guide hole 211K, and a hooking portion 211L.

  The supports 211A to 211F are made of a boss or the like that protrudes forward (may be a cylindrical shape; hereinafter, the same applies to the columnar shape). The second to seventh gears 218 to 222 are rotatably supported on the supports 211A to 211E, respectively. Each gear has a through hole at the center thereof, and is rotatably supported by inserting a support body into the through hole. Each gear can rotate with the central axis of each support as a rotation axis. The support body 211F rotatably supports a rotating arm 225 (described in detail later).

  The concave rail 211J is a rail having a U-shaped cross section (a vertical line is a bottom surface) and extends in the vertical direction. A rack 251 provided in the movable body 250 is fitted to the concave rail 211J so as to be slidable up and down. The concave rail 211J guides the direction of movement of the rack 251 (that is, movement of the movable body 250) in the vertical direction.

  The guide hole 211K is a through hole extending in the vertical direction, and is provided in a portion to which the slide member 227 is attached. The slide member 227 is provided with a protrusion (not shown) extending rearward, and the protrusion is inserted into the guide hole 211K. A retaining member (not shown) larger than the width of the guide hole 211K (the length in the left-right direction) is attached to the rear end of the protrusion. Accordingly, the slide member 227 is attached to the base body 211 so as not to move forward (does not come off the base body 211) and to be movable in the vertical direction (guided by the guide hole 211K).

  The hook portion 211L is a protrusion having a notch, and one end of the elastic body 229 is hooked on the notch.

  The drive motor 215 is attached to the base body 211 via the drive motor attachment member 213. The drive motor 215 has a rotation shaft 215A. Here, the drive motor 215 is a stepping motor, and its operation is controlled by the effect control board 12 (FIG. 2). The drive motor 215 rotates the rotating shaft 215A (FIG. 5) by a predetermined angle in synchronization with a control signal (here, a drive pulse) from the effect control board 12. A first gear 217 is fitted to the rotation shaft 215A. Accordingly, the first gear 217 rotates together with the rotation shaft 215A. The first gear 217 is in mesh with the second gear 218.

  The third gear 219 includes a cylindrical columnar part 219A in which a part of the interior is hollowed out, and an external gear 219B disposed behind the cylindrical part 219A. The external gear 219B meshes with the second gear 218. The third gear 221 includes a detection piece 219C having an arcuate outer edge that protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 219A, and a cylindrical protrusion that protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 219A and further protrudes rearward. 219D.

  The detection piece 219 </ b> C rotates with the third gear 219 and is detected by a detection sensor 223 attached to the base body 211. The detection sensor 223 is, for example, a photo sensor (such as a sensor that detects that the space between the light receiving unit and the light emitting unit is shielded by the detection target), and detection that indicates that the detection piece 219C has been detected. Output a signal. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the movable body 250 moves to the advanced position in conjunction with the rotation of the third gear 219. The detection piece 219C is disposed at a position detected by the detection sensor 223 when the rotation gear rotates until the movable body 250 is positioned at the advanced position.

  The fourth gear 220 has a shape in which a small-diameter first gear (not shown) and a large-diameter second gear are stacked with a common rotation axis. The first gear is located behind the second gear and meshes with the fifth gear 221. The second gear meshes with the teeth of the rack 251 provided in the movable body 250. The fifth gear 221 and the sixth gear 222 are meshed with linear teeth 227A included in the slide member 227.

  The rotating arm 225 has a fan shape. The rotary arm 225 includes a long hole 225A into which the cylindrical protrusion 252A provided in the movable body 250 is inserted, a long hole 225B into which the protrusion 219D is inserted, and a through hole 225C into which the support body 211F is inserted. Prepare. The through hole 225 </ b> C is located at the center of a circle that forms a fan having the shape of the rotary arm 225. The rotation arm 225 is attached to the base body 211 so as to be rotatable about the central axis of the support body 211C as a rotation axis. The long hole 225A is disposed on the first hypotenuse (the side constituted by the radius of the circle) of the fan, and is long in the direction in which the first hypotenuse extends. The long hole 225 </ b> B is disposed on the second hypotenuse of the fan and is long in the direction in which the second hypotenuse extends. The width (length in the short direction) of the long hole 225A is substantially the same as the diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 252A (the diameter is slightly shorter). The width of the long hole 225B is substantially the same as the diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 219D (the diameter is slightly shorter).

  The slide member 227 includes linear teeth 227A (extending in the vertical direction) that mesh with the fifth gear 221 and the sixth gear 222, and functions as a rack having the fifth gear 221 and the sixth gear 222 as pinions. In addition, the slide member 227 includes a hook portion 227B having a notch at a lower portion (below the hook portion 227B of the slide member 227), and the other end of the elastic body 229 is hooked. As described above, the slide member 227 can move (slide) in the vertical direction with respect to the base body 211. As described above, the fifth gear 221 meshes with the fourth gear 220 and the teeth 227A of the slide member 227, and the fourth gear 220 (pinion) meshes with the teeth of the rack 251 included in the movable body 250. ing. Therefore, the slide member 227 is interlocked with the movable body 250. Specifically, when the slide member 227 moves upward, the movable body 250 also moves upward (see FIG. 3 and the like). The sixth gear 222 guides the slide member 227 so that the slide member 227 does not tilt.

  The elastic body 229 includes a coil spring, rubber, and the like. One end of the elastic body 229 is hooked on the hook portion 211L of the base body 211, and the other end of the elastic body 229 is hooked on the hook portion 227B of the slide member 227. And the elastic body 229 will be in the extended state, when the slide member 227 is located in the lowest position (at the time of FIG. 3 (A) or the state of FIGS. 5-4). That is, the slide member 227 is biased upward by the elastic force of the elastic body 229 (receives an upward force). Since the slide member 227 and the movable body 250 are interlocked as described above, the movable body 250 is also biased upward by the elastic force of the elastic body 229. That is, the elastic body 229 assists the upward movement of the movable body 250.

(Operation of the drive mechanism 210, etc.)
When the drive motor 215 rotates the rotation shaft 215A in the normal direction (left rotation), the first gear 217 also rotates in the normal direction. Since the second gear 218 is engaged with the first gear 217 and the second gear 218 is engaged with the third gear 219, the rotation of the rotation shaft 215A causes the second gear 218 to rotate in the reverse direction (right rotation). ) And the third gear 219 rotates forward. Due to the forward rotation of the third gear 219, the protrusion 219D also moves while drawing an arc. The protrusion 219D pushes the inner wall of the long hole 225B as it moves. Thereby, the rotating arm 225 rotates upward (counterclockwise) around the support body 211F. By the rotation of the rotary arm 225, the protrusion 252A included in the movable body 250 inserted in the long hole 225A is moved upward. Thereby, the movable body 250 moves upward (advance position). When the drive motor 215 reversely rotates the rotating shaft 215A, the movable body 250 moves downward (initial position) (the rotation direction of each gear may be considered as the reverse direction). Thus, the drive mechanism 210 converts the rotational force of the drive motor 215 into a drive force that moves the movable body 250 in the vertical direction. As described above, the upward movement of the movable body 250 is assisted by the elastic body 229. Further, the elastic body 229 becomes a resistance against the movable body 250 moving downward. Thereby, the load on the drive motor 215 due to the weight of the movable body 250 can be reduced, and the movable body 250 can move smoothly in the vertical direction.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, the movable body 250 may be stopped at the advanced position. Thereby, the period in which the elastic body 229 is extended can be shortened, and the elastic force of the elastic body can be reduced from becoming weaker as time elapses.

  The movable body 250 is moved in the vertical direction under the control of the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). Specifically, when moving the movable body 250 from the initial position to the advanced position, the effect control board 12 controls the drive motor 215 to rotate the rotating shaft 215A and detects the detection piece 219C by the detection sensor 223. When the detection signal is received from the detection sensor 223 or when the detection signal is received for a certain period, that is, when the movable body 250 moves to the advanced position, the rotation of the rotating shaft 215A is stopped. Thereby, the movable body 250 can be stopped at the advance position. When the movable body 250 is returned from the advanced position to the initial position, the drive motor 215 has the same rotation angle as that when the movable body 250 is moved from the initial position to the advanced position (for example, the information is held in the RAM 122). The rotating shaft 215A is reversely rotated. For example, the number of supplied drive pulses is counted, and the same number of drive pulses is supplied during reverse rotation, whereby the rotary shaft 215A is reversely rotated. A detection sensor (the same sensor as the detection sensor 223, for example, a photo sensor) is provided corresponding to the position of the detection piece 219C when the movable body 250 is in the initial position, and the detection piece 219C is attached by the detection sensor. When detected, the reverse rotation of the rotating shaft 215A may be stopped.

(Structure of movable body 250, etc.)
Next, the detailed structure of the movable body 250 will be described with reference to FIGS. The movable body 250 has a heart-shaped decorative body 269 and a member representing a LOVE character provided in front of the movable body 250, and the decorative body 269 is deformed or each LOVE character moves, Perform a highly effective performance.

  The movable body 250 includes a rack 251, a plate-like member 252, a substrate 253, a base body 255, an LED substrate 256, a drive motor 257, a detection sensor 259, first to third gears 261 to 263, First to second slide members 265 to 266, first to second mounting members 267 to 268, a decorative body 269, a predetermined mechanism X (a member that forms “LOVE” and a mechanism that moves each character of “LOVE”) And).

(Configuration other than the predetermined mechanism X in the movable body 250)
First, a configuration other than the predetermined mechanism X will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The rack 251 has teeth extending in the vertical direction that mesh with the fourth gear 220 (FIG. 5 and the like). As can be seen from the above, the rack 251 is urged upward by the elastic body 229 (FIG. 5 and the like) via the fourth gear 220 and the like.

  The plate member 252 is formed integrally with the rack 251. The plate-like member 252 has a columnar protrusion 252A that protrudes rearward from the plate-like main body.

  The board 253 is a circuit board that has a predetermined circuit and is electrically connected to the effect control board 12. The board 253 relays control signals supplied from the effect control board 12 to the drive motor 257, the drive motor 273 described later, the LED board 275 described later, and the like, and the effect control is performed from the detection sensor 259 described later and the detection sensor S described later. The detection signal supplied to the substrate 12 is relayed. The substrate 253 is attached to the rear surface of the base body 255. The substrate 253 has a through hole and a notch, and the plate-like member 252 is attached to the rear surface of the base body 255 with a screw, a screw or the like through the through hole or the notch. As a result, the rack 251 is also attached to the base body 255.

  The base body 255 serves as a base for the movable body 250 and supports various components on the front surface and the rear surface. The base body 255 includes rack portions 255A and 255B extending in the left-right direction on the front surface (these are used in the predetermined mechanism X). In addition, the base body 255 includes protrusions 255C to 255H made of a columnar boss or the like that protrudes rearward from the periphery (rear surface or the like). The base body 255 includes protrusions 255I to 255L made of a cylindrical boss or the like that protrudes forward from the periphery (front surface or the like) (these are used in the predetermined mechanism X). The base body 255 also includes a fixing portion 255J to which a detection sensor (not shown) (referred to as a detection sensor S for explanation) is fixed. The detection sensor S detects a detection piece 266D of a second slide member 266, which will be described later, and may be a photo sensor or the like, similar to the detection sensor 223. In addition, an LED substrate 256 is inserted into the upper portion of the base body 255, and a plurality of insertion portions 255M for fixing the LED substrate 256 are formed.

  The LED substrate 256 is held on the curved upper surface of the base body 255 by the insertion portion 255M and the insertion portion 271C (see FIG. 8). The substrate body 256B of the LED substrate 256 has a curved shape in accordance with the shape of the base body 255. The LED board 256 is electrically connected to the board 253, and various circuits, LEDs 256A for emitting light, and connectors 256C are mounted on the board body 256B. A light source other than the LED 256A may be employed as the light source. The LED board 256 causes the LED 256 </ b> A to emit light based on a control signal from the effect control board 12 relayed by the board 253. The upper part of the decorative body 269 is illuminated by the light emission of the LED 256A. Since the decorative body 269 can transmit light, the upper part appears to emit light by the light from the LED 256A. Details of the LED substrate 256 will be described later.

  The drive motor 257 is attached to the front surface of the base body 255. The rotation shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 passes through a through hole provided in the base body 255 and extends to the rear of the base body 255. The drive motor 257 is operated by a control signal (such as a drive pulse) from the effect control board 12.

  The detection sensor 259 is attached to the front surface of the base body 255. The detection target of the detection sensor 259 will be described later (used in the predetermined mechanism X). The detection sensor 259 may be a photo sensor or the like, similar to the detection sensor 223.

  The first gear 261 is fitted to the rotation shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 and rotates together with the rotation shaft 257A. The first gear 261 meshes with the second gear 262 and the third gear 263 arranged on the left and right sides of the first gear 261. The second gear 262 is rotatably supported by the base body 255 by inserting a protrusion 255C into a through hole formed at the center thereof. The third gear 263 is rotatably supported by the base body 255 by inserting a protrusion 255D into a through hole formed at the center thereof. Each gear can rotate with the central axis of each protrusion as a rotation axis. The second gear 262 includes a columnar protrusion 262A that protrudes rearward. The third gear 263 includes a columnar protrusion 263A protruding rearward.

  The first slide member 265 includes a long hole 265A elongated in the vertical direction at the right end and a long hole 265B elongated in the horizontal direction at the center. A protrusion 262A is inserted into the long hole 265A. The width (length in the left-right direction) of the long hole 265A is substantially the same as the diameter of the protrusion 262A (the diameter is slightly shorter). The protrusion 262A can move in the long hole 265A. Projections 255E and 255F arranged in the left-right direction as an example are inserted into the long holes 265B. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the long hole 265B is substantially the same as the diameter of the protrusions 255E and 255F (the diameter is slightly shorter). The protrusions 255E and 255F can move in the long hole 265B. The protrusions 255E and 255F restrict the first slide member 265 from moving in directions other than the left-right direction. The first slide member 265 has two small holes 265C at the left end.

  The second slide member 266 includes a long hole 266A elongated in the vertical direction at the left end portion and a long hole 266B elongated in the horizontal direction at the center. A protrusion 263A is inserted into the long hole 266A. The width (length in the left-right direction) of the long hole 266A is substantially the same as the diameter of the protrusion 263A (the diameter is slightly shorter). The protrusion 263A can move in the long hole 266A. In the long hole 266B, protrusions 255G and 255H arranged in one example in the left-right direction are inserted. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the long hole 266B is substantially the same as the diameter of the protrusions 255G and 255H (the diameter is slightly shorter). The protrusions 255G and 255H can move in the long hole 266B. The protrusions 255G and 255H restrict the second slide member 266 from moving in directions other than the left-right direction. The second slide member 266 has two small holes 266C at the right end.

  The second slide member 266 includes a detection piece 266D detected by the detection sensor S. The detection piece 266D is disposed at a position that is detected by the detection sensor S when the second slide member 266 is in the initial position (when a decorative body that will be described later is not deformed, as shown in FIG. 12A). . When detecting the detection piece 266D, the detection sensor S supplies a detection signal indicating that to the effect control board 12.

  The first attachment member 267 is disposed inside the decorative body 269 (details will be described later). The first mounting member 267 has two small-diameter bars 267A that protrude rearward. The two small-diameter bars 267A are respectively fitted into the two small holes 265C of the first slide member 265 through the two small holes 269F provided in the projecting portion 269E of the decorative body 269. Accordingly, the first attachment member 267 is attached to the left end portion of the first slide member 265 with the projecting portion 269E of the decorative body 269 interposed therebetween. The first attachment member 267 has a through hole 267B extending in the left-right direction. Of the first mounting member 267, a portion where the through hole 267B is formed has a shape that enters the through hole 269A of the decorative body 269 (see also FIG. 8 and the like. The first mounting member 267 is a part of the decorative body 269). Visible from outside). Accordingly, the through hole 267B is disposed inside the through hole 269A.

  The second attachment member 268 is disposed inside the decorative body 269 (details will be described later). The second mounting member 268 has two small-diameter bars 268A protruding rearward. The two small diameter bars 268A pass through the two small holes 269G provided in the projecting portion 269E of the decorative body 269, respectively, and are fitted into the two small holes 266C of the second slide member 266, respectively. Accordingly, the second attachment member 268 is attached to the right end portion of the second slide member 266 with the projecting portion 269E of the decorative body 269 interposed therebetween. The second mounting member 268 has a through hole 268B extending in the left-right direction. Of the second mounting member 268, the portion where the through hole 268 </ b> B is formed has a shape that enters the through hole 269 </ b> D of the decorative body 269 (see also FIG. 8 and the like. The second mounting member 268 is a part of the decorative body 269. Visible from outside). Accordingly, the through hole 268B is disposed inside the through hole 269D.

  The decorative body 269 has a heart shape that swells in the forward direction, and is a member that can transmit light. The decorative body 269 is given a predetermined decoration. The decorative body 269 is made of, for example, natural rubber or various synthetic rubbers including silicone rubber, and can be elastically deformed. The decorative body 269 is provided with through-holes 269A and 269D on its side and through-holes 269B and 269C on the front. The end portions of the first mounting member 267 and the second mounting member 268 enter the through holes 269A and 269D, respectively. The decorative body 269 has a protruding portion 269E that protrudes inward from the rear end of the side portion. The projecting portion 269E of the decorative body 269 is provided with two small holes 269F and two small holes 269G, and a small-diameter bar 267A of the first mounting member 267 (two small holes 265C of the first slide member 265). And a small-diameter bar 268A of the second mounting member 268 (which is fitted into the two small holes 266C of the second slide member 266). Therefore, the decorative body 269 is connected to the first attachment member 267 and the first slide member 265 at the left end portion provided with the small hole 269F, and the second attachment member 268 at the right end portion provided with the small hole 269G. And the second slide member 266. Further, a substantially triangular cutout 269H and a cutout 269I are formed on the upper portion of the projecting portion 269E of the decorative body 269. When a force that compresses the decorative body 269 from the left-right direction is applied, the notch 269H and the notch 269I close the notched portion. Thereby, the decorative body 269 is easily deformed by the compressive force from the left-right direction. The decorative body 269 houses the base body 255 and the like therein. Therefore, the size of the configuration for operating the movable body 250 is made compact.

(Operation for deforming the decorative body 269)
When the drive motor 257 rotates the rotation shaft 257A in the normal direction (right rotation), the first gear 261 also rotates in the normal direction. The second gear 262 and the third gear 263 are engaged with the first gear 261, and the second gear 262 and the third gear 263 rotate in the reverse direction (left rotation) when the rotating shaft 257A rotates forward. Here, the protrusion 262A of the second gear 262 is provided in the upper part of the second gear 262, while the protrusion 263A of the second gear 263 is provided in the lower part of the second gear 263. ing. Accordingly, when the second gear 262 and the third gear 263 rotate in the reverse direction, the protrusion 262A moves to the left and the protrusion 263A moves to the right. In other words, the protrusions 262A and the protrusions 263A move in directions away from each other because the protrusions 262A and the protrusions 263A are at target positions with respect to the rotation axis of each gear. The protrusion 262A that moves to the left pushes the inner wall of the long hole 265A of the first slide member 265, and slides the first slide member 265 to the left (the first attachment member 267 also moves together). The protrusion 263A that moves to the right pushes the inner wall of the long hole 266A of the second slide member 266, and slides the second slide member 266 to the right (the second attachment member 268 also moves together). As described above, the first slide member 265 (and the first attachment member 267) and the second slide member 266 (and the second attachment member 268) move in the direction away from each other along the left-right direction.

  When the drive motor 257 rotates the rotating shaft 257A in the reverse direction, the operation in the reverse direction is performed, and the first slide member 265 and the first attachment member 267, and the second slide member 266 and the second attachment member 268 are the same. Move in a direction approaching each other along the left-right direction.

  Since the first slide member 265 and the first attachment member 267 are connected in a state where the left end portion of the decorative body 269 is sandwiched, the left end portion also moves left and right along with the left and right movements. Since the second slide member 266 and the second attachment member 268 are connected in a state where the right end portion of the decorative body 269 is sandwiched, the right end portion also moves left and right along with the left and right movement thereof. Therefore, when the drive motor 257 rotates the rotating shaft 257A in the normal direction, the decorative body 269 is elastically deformed so as to be pulled from both the left and right sides (see the left side in FIG. 12B), and the rotating shaft 257A rotates in the reverse direction. Then, the decorative body 269 is elastically deformed as if pressed from both the left and right sides (see the left side of FIG. 12C in particular). As described above, a substantially triangular cutout 269H and a cutout 269I are formed on the upper portion of the overhanging portion 269E of the decorative body 269. Accordingly, when the decorative body 269 is pressed from both the left and right sides and is compressed, the notch formed in a substantially triangular shape is closed, and the decorative body 269 is easily deformed.

  As described above, the drive motor 257 is controlled by the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 repeats rotating the rotating shaft 257A forward and rotating backward by supplying a control signal to the drive motor 257. Then, the decorative body 269 repeats elastic deformation so as to be pulled left and right and elastic deformation so as to be pushed from the left and right. Thereby, the heart-shaped decorative body 269 looks like a heart (see FIGS. 12 and 16). Note that the effect control board 12 detects that the second slide member 266 is in the initial position (that is, the decorative body 269 is in the initial state (the state shown in FIG. 12A)) by the detection sensor S. The effect control board 12 detects that the second slide member 266 is in the initial position when the detection signal from the detection sensor S is received (or when it is received over a predetermined period). A detection sensor is provided at the position of the detection piece 266D when the second slide member 266 is at the position shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C, and the movable body 250 is brought into the state shown in FIGS. It may be detected that the rotation direction of the rotation shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 is controlled based on this detection.

(Structure of the predetermined mechanism X)
Next, the detailed structure of the predetermined mechanism X will be described with reference to FIGS. The predetermined mechanism X includes a cover body 271, a drive motor 273, an LED board 275, a cover body 277, first to fourth character members 281 to 284, and a driving force transmission mechanism X1 (see FIG. 8). ).

  The cover body 271 covers the base body 255 from the front by being attached to the base body 255 to which the driving force transmission mechanism X1 and the like are attached. The cover body 271 has through holes 271A to 271B (these applications will be described later). Further, the LED board 256 is inserted into the upper portion of the cover body 271, and a plurality of insertion portions 271 </ b> C for fixing the LED board 256 are formed.

  The drive motor 273 is attached to the front surface of the cover body 271. The rotation shaft of the drive motor 273 passes through a through hole provided in the cover body 271 and extends behind the cover body 271. The drive motor 273 is operated by a control signal (such as a drive pulse) from the effect control board 12.

  The LED substrate 275 is electrically connected to the substrate 253. The LED substrate 275 is mounted with various circuits and an LED 275A that emits light forward (decorative body 269). A light source other than the LED 275A may be used. The LED board 275 causes the LED 275A to emit light based on a control signal from the effect control board 12 relayed by the board 253. The decorative body 269 is illuminated by light emission of the LED 275A (irradiation of light from the LED 275A). Since the decorative body 269 can transmit light, it appears to emit light by such illumination. The LED substrate 275 has a large cutout 275B that extends from the top to the center. Note that the manner of light emission appears to change due to the elastic deformation of the decorative body 269. This point will be described later.

  The cover body 277 has through-holes 277A and 277B (these applications will be described later). The cover body 277 covers the front of the LED board 275, the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6), and the drive motor 273, and is interposed between these and the decorative body 269. The cover body 277 covers the upper part of the LED substrate 256. Since the cover body 277 is made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin, the light from the LED 275A mounted on the LED board 275 passes through the cover body 277 and illuminates the front surface of the decorative body 269. Further, the light from the LED 256 </ b> A mounted on the LED substrate 256 passes through the cover body 277 and illuminates the upper portion of the decorative body 269. The cover body 277 prevents the decorative body 269 from contacting the LED board 256, the LED board 275, the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6), and the drive motor 273. Thereby, the heat generated from these electronic components is transmitted to the decorative body 269, and the decorative body 269 can be prevented from being damaged. Furthermore, the contact between the electronic component and the decorative body 269 is prevented, and the electronic component is prevented from being damaged. The cover body 277 is attached to the cover body 271 via the LED substrate 275. For example, as shown in FIG. 8, by providing a through hole that communicates when the cover body 277 and the LED substrate 275 are overlapped with each other and screwing the cover body 271 through a screw, a screw, or the like, The cover body 277 and the LED substrate 275 are attached to the cover body 271. In addition, at the time of this attachment, the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6) and the drive motor 273 pass through the notch 275B of the LED board 275.

  The first character member 281 is a member expressing a character “L”, the second character member 282 is a member expressing a character “O”, and the third character member 283 is a character “V”. The fourth character member 284 is a member expressing the letter “E”. Each of these members includes fitting rods 281A to 284A (which will be described later).

  The third character member 283 includes an LED substrate 283B, a diffusion plate 283C, and a cover body 283D in addition to the fitting rod 283A (see FIG. 8). The LED substrate 283B is electrically connected to the LED substrate 275 or the substrate 253. The LED substrate 283B is mounted with various circuits and LEDs that emit light forward (may be other light sources). The LED board 283B causes the LED to emit light based on a control signal from the effect control board 12 relayed by the board 253 or the LED board 275. The diffusion plate 283C diffuses light from the LED of the LED substrate 283B (light irradiated from the LED). The cover body 283D is a transparent or translucent member and transmits the light diffused by the diffusion plate 283C. With such a configuration, the third character member 283 can emit light in order to enhance the effect. The first character member 281, the second character member 282, and the fourth character member 284 have the same configuration. Therefore, the first to fourth character members 281 to 284 can emit light individually or simultaneously.

  The driving force transmission mechanism X1 includes rack portions 255A and 255B, and includes first to third pinion gears 291 to 293 and first to fourth rack members 295 to 298.

  The first pinion gear 291 is fitted to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 273 and rotates together with the rotation shaft. The second pinion gear 292 is rotatably supported by the first rack member 295. The third pinion gear 293 is rotatably supported by the third rack member 297. The second pinion gear 292 and the third pinion gear 293 have a shape in which a small-diameter first gear (located in the front) and a large-diameter second gear (located in the rear) are stacked with a common rotation axis. The first gear of the second pinion gear 292 meshes with the teeth of the rack portion 255A extending in the left-right direction (see also FIG. 10, FIG. 11, etc.). The first gear of the third pinion gear 293 meshes with the teeth of the rack portion 255B extending in the left-right direction (see also FIG. 10, FIG. 11, etc.). The meshing destination of the second gear of each gear will be described later.

  The first rack member 295 has a shape elongated in the left-right direction, and functions as a rack that moves in the left-right direction as the first pinion gear 291 rotates. The first rack member 295 includes protrusions 295A to 295C, a mounting portion 295D, a detection piece 295E, teeth 295F, and long holes 295I and 295J.

  The protrusions 295A to 295C are formed of a columnar boss protruding backward. The protrusion 295A supports the second pinion gear 292 so as to be rotatable. Specifically, the protrusion 295A is supported by inserting the protrusion 295A into the central through hole of the second pinion gear 292. The second pinion gear 292 can rotate with the central axis of the protrusion 295A as the rotation axis. The protrusions 295 </ b> B to 295 </ b> C are arranged in the left-right direction and are inserted into a long hole 296 </ b> B (described later) of the second rack member 296.

  The attachment portion 295D is formed of a cylindrical boss having a fitting hole. The fitting rod 282A of the second character member 282 is fitted into the fitting hole of the attachment portion 295D. The fitting rod 282A passes through the through hole 269B of the decorative body 269, the through hole 271A of the cover body 271, the through hole 277A of the cover body 277, and the notch 275B of the LED substrate 275, and is fitted to the mounting portion 295D. As will be described later, the second character member 282 moves in the left-right direction as the first rack member 295 moves. Therefore, the shape of the notch 275B does not hinder the movement of the second character member 282, and the through hole 269B, the through hole 271A, and the through hole 277A prevent the movement of the second character member 282. It is long in the left-right direction to allow.

  The detection piece 295E is a portion protruding upward, and is a detection target by the detection sensor 259. The detection sensor 259 may be the same as the detection sensor 223, for example. When the first rack member 295 is in the initial position (the initial state of the movable body 250) (see FIG. 10), the detection piece 295E is detected (that is, the initial position). That is, the detection sensor 259 detects the initial position of the first rack member 295 (the initial state of the movable body 250).

  The teeth 295F extend in the left-right direction and mesh with the first pinion gear 291 from above.

  The long holes 295I and 295J are long in the left-right direction, and the protrusion 255I is inserted into the long hole 295I, and the protrusion 255J is inserted into the long hole 295J. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the long holes 295I and 295J is substantially the same as the diameter of the cylindrical protrusions 255I and 255J (the diameter is slightly shorter). Accordingly, the first rack member 295 is slidable in the left-right direction, but does not move in the other directions.

  The second rack member 296 has a shape that is long in the left-right direction, and is disposed in front of the first rack member 295. The second rack member 296 functions as a rack that moves in the left-right direction as the second pinion gear 292 rotates as will be described later. The second rack member 296 includes teeth 296A, a long hole 296B, and an attachment portion 296C.

  The teeth 296 </ b> A extend in the left-right direction and mesh with the large-diameter second gear of the second pinion gear 292 from below.

  Projections 295B and 295C arranged in the left-right direction are inserted into the long hole 296B. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the long hole 296B is substantially the same as the diameter of the cylindrical protrusions 295B and 295C (the diameter is slightly shorter). Therefore, the second rack member 296 is slidable in the left-right direction but does not move in the other directions.

  The protrusions 295B and 295C are provided on the left side of the first rack member 295, and the long hole 296B is provided on the right side of the second rack member 296. Accordingly, the left end of the second rack member 296 is located on the left side of the left end of the first rack member 295. The left portion of the second rack member 296 passes through the through hole 267B of the first mounting member 267 (the through hole 269A of the decorative body 269) (see FIGS. 10 and 11).

  The attachment portion 296C is formed of a cylindrical boss having a fitting hole. The fitting hole 281A of the first character member 281 is fitted into the fitting hole. The attachment portion 296C is provided at the left end of the second rack member 296 and is always exposed from the decorative body 269 and the like (see FIGS. 10 and 11). Therefore, unlike the second character member 282, the first character member 281 is fitted and attached to the attachment portion 296C without passing through the through hole or the like.

  The third rack member 297 is substantially L-shaped, and functions as a rack that moves in the left-right direction as the first pinion gear 291 rotates. The third rack member 297 includes protrusions 297A to 297C, a mounting portion 297D, teeth 297F, and long holes 297K and 297L.

  The protrusions 297A to 297C are formed of a columnar boss protruding backward. The protrusion 297A supports the third pinion gear 293 so as to be rotatable. Specifically, the protrusion 297A is supported by inserting the protrusion 297A into the central through hole of the third pinion gear 293. The third pinion gear 293 can rotate with the central axis of the protrusion 297A as the rotation axis. The protrusions 297 </ b> B to 297 </ b> C are arranged in the left-right direction, and are inserted into a long hole 298 </ b> B described later of the fourth rack member 298.

  The attachment portion 297D is formed of a cylindrical boss having a fitting hole. The fitting rod 283A of the third character member 283 is fitted into the fitting hole of the attachment portion 297D. The fitting rod 283A passes through the through hole 269C of the decorative body 269, the through hole 271B of the cover body 271, the through hole 277B of the cover body 277, and the notch 275B of the LED substrate 275, and is fitted to the mounting portion 297D. As will be described later, the third character member 283 moves in the left-right direction as the third rack member 297 moves. Therefore, the shape of the notch 275B does not hinder the movement of the third character member 283, and the through hole 269C, the through hole 271B, and the through hole 277B prevent the movement of the third character member 283. It is long in the left-right direction to allow.

  The teeth 297F extend in the left-right direction and mesh with the first pinion gear 291 from the lower side.

  The long holes 297K and 297L are long in the left-right direction, and the protrusion 255K is inserted into the long hole 297K, and the protrusion 255L is inserted into the long hole 295L. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the long holes 297K and 297L is substantially the same as the diameter of the cylindrical protrusions 255K and 255L (the diameter is slightly shorter). Therefore, the third rack member 297 can slide in the left-right direction but does not move in the other directions.

  The fourth rack member 298 has an elongated shape in the left-right direction, and is disposed in front of the third rack member 297. The fourth rack member 298 functions as a rack that moves in the left-right direction as the third pinion gear 293 rotates as will be described later. The fourth rack member 298 includes teeth 298A, a long hole 298B, and an attachment portion 298C.

  The teeth 298 </ b> A extend in the left-right direction and mesh with the large-diameter second gear of the third pinion gear 293 from below.

  Projections 297B and 297C arranged in the left-right direction are inserted into the long hole 298B. The width (length in the vertical direction) of the long hole 298B is substantially the same as the diameter of the columnar protrusions 297B and 297C (the diameter is slightly shorter). Accordingly, the fourth rack member 298 is slidable in the left-right direction, but does not move in the other directions.

  The protrusions 297B and 297C are provided on the right side of the third rack member 297, and the long hole 298B is provided on the left side of the fourth rack member 298. Accordingly, the right end of the fourth rack member 298 is located on the right side of the right end of the third rack member 297. The left portion of the fourth rack member 298 passes through the through hole 268B (the through hole 269D of the decorative body 269) of the second mounting member 268 (see FIGS. 10 and 11).

  The attachment portion 298C is formed of a cylindrical boss having a fitting hole. The fitting hole 284A of the fourth character member 284 is fitted into the fitting hole. The attachment portion 298C is provided at the right end of the fourth rack member 298 and is always exposed from the decorative body 269 and the like (see FIGS. 10 and 11). Therefore, unlike the third character member 283, the fourth character member 284 is fitted and attached to the attachment portion 298C without passing through the through hole or the like.

(Operation of the specified mechanism X etc.)
The operation of the predetermined mechanism X will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 (the first rack member 295 and the second rack member 296 are in the rightmost position, and the third rack member 297 and the fourth rack member 298 are in the leftmost position) is the initial state. To do.

  When the drive motor 273 rotates the rotation shaft forward (left rotation) from the initial state of FIG. 10, the first pinion gear 291 fitted to the rotation shaft also rotates forward. By this forward rotation, the first rack member 295 having teeth 295F meshing with the first pinion gear 291 from above slides to the left, and the third rack member 297 having teeth 297F meshing with the first pinion gear 291 from below slides to the right. .

  When the first rack member 295 moves to the left, the second pinion gear 292 supported by the protrusion 295A of the first rack member 295 also moves to the left. Since the first gear having a small diameter included in the second pinion gear 292 meshes with the non-movable rack portion 255A from below, the second pinion gear 292 moves to the left while performing reverse rotation (right rotation). The second pinion gear 292 has a large-diameter second gear that meshes with the teeth 296A of the second rack member 296 from above, so that the second rack member 296 also moves to the left by the movement and reverse rotation of the second pinion gear 292. To do. By using the second pinion gear 292, the movement amount of the second rack member 296 is larger than that of the first rack member 295.

  When the third rack member 297 moves to the right, the third pinion gear 293 supported by the protrusion 297A of the third rack member 297 also moves to the right. Since the first gear having a small diameter included in the third pinion gear 293 meshes with the stationary rack portion 255B from below, the third pinion gear 293 moves to the right while rotating forward. Since the second large gear having the third pinion gear 293 meshes with the teeth 298A of the fourth rack member 298 from above, the fourth rack member 298 also moves to the right by the movement and reverse rotation of the third pinion gear 293. To do. Due to the use of the third pinion gear 293, the moving amount of the fourth rack member 298 is larger than that of the third rack member 297.

  The first character member 281 is attached to the leftmost second rack member 296 (attachment portion 296C), and the second character member 282 is attached to the first rack member 295 (attachment portion 295D) from the left. The third character member 283 is attached to the third rack member 297 (attachment portion 297D) third from the left, and the fourth character member 284 is attached to the rightmost fourth rack member 298 (attachment portion 298C). Since each rack member is moved, each character member is also moved.

  FIG. 11 shows a state after the first to fourth rack members 295 to 298 and the first to fourth character members 281 to 284 have moved. The amount of movement of the second rack member 296 (first character member 281) is larger than that of the first rack member 295 (second character member 282). The amount of movement of the fourth rack member 298 (fourth character member 284) is larger than that of the third rack member 297 (third character member 283). Due to such a relationship, in this embodiment, the distance between the members when the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 move increases with the same degree of change (at any timing during the movement). Each member is arranged at substantially equal intervals).

  Note that the second character member 282 and the third character member 283 can move without interfering with the decorative body 269 and the like through the through-hole 269B and the through-hole 269C of the decorative body 269. In addition, since the mounting portion 296C to which the first character member 281 is attached and the attachment portion 298C to which the fourth character member 284 is attached are always outside the decorative body 269, they do not interfere with the decorative body 269 or the like. It is possible to move to. That is, the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 can move independently of the deformation of the decorative body 269.

  In the state shown in FIG. 11, when the drive motor 273 rotates the rotating shaft in the reverse direction, an operation opposite to the operation described above is performed, and the initial state shown in FIG. 10 is restored.

  The drive motor 273 is controlled by the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 supplies the control signal to the drive motor 273, thereby rotating the rotation shaft of the drive motor 273 forward by a predetermined rotation angle, and changing the state of FIG. Change the character spacing (increase the spacing). Further, the effect control board 12 supplies a control signal to the drive motor 273 to reversely rotate the rotation shaft of the drive motor 273, thereby changing the interval of the LOVE character from the state of FIG. 11 to the state of FIG. Reduce the interval). The effect control board 12 detects the detection piece 295E by the detection sensor 259 (when the detection signal is received from the detection sensor 259 or when the detection signal is received for a certain period), that is, each rack such as the first rack member 295 When the member or the like is in the initial position (when it is in the state of FIG. 10), the drive of the drive motor 273 is terminated.

  The effect control board 12 repeatedly performs forward rotation and reverse rotation of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 273, and the interval between the characters “LOVE” (the intervals between the first to fourth character members 281 to 284). ) May be continuously changed a plurality of times.

  A detection sensor is provided at the position of the detection piece 295E in the state of FIG. 11, and the effect control board 12 detects the detection piece 295E by the detection sensor, thereby detecting the current state of FIG. May be. The effect control board 12 may control the drive motor 273 based on the detection.

(Relationship between deformation of movable body 250 and light emission)
The relationship between the deformation of the movable body 250 and the light emission mode of the movable body 250 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12A shows an initial state of the movable body 250. The movable body 250 (decorative body 269) at this time is not deformed. The effect control board 12 controls the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6 etc.), and the movable body 250 changes in the order of FIG. 12 (A) → (B) → (C) → (A) → (B) →. (Thus, the decorative body appears to be throbbing) (strictly speaking, the state (A) also enters between (B) and (C) in FIG. 12. The state (A) is ( This is because it is a state between the state of B) and the state of (C).) In addition, when deforming the movable body 250, the effect control board 12 supplies a control signal to the LED board 275 via the board 253, thereby causing the LED 275A to emit light (that is, the decorative body 269 is illuminated from the rear). . In the following description, it is assumed that the luminance of the LED 275A is constant.

  The production control board 12 supplies a control signal to the LED board 283B or the like via the board 253 and / or the LED board 275 in accordance with the light emission of the LED 275A or regardless of the light emission. The four character members 281 to 284 may emit light individually or simultaneously to enhance the effect.

  When the rotation shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6 and the like) is rotated forward (right rotation) from the initial state, the first gear 261 is also rotated forward as described above, via the second gear 262 and the third gear 263. The first slide member 265 and the first attachment member 267, and the second slide member 266 and the second attachment member 268 move away from each other (see FIG. 12B). As a result, the decorative body 269 extends in the left-right direction (is elastically deformed in such a manner that it is pulled from both the left-right direction). Then, the thickness of the decorative body 269 is reduced, the light transmittance is improved, and more light from the LED 275A is transmitted, so that the movable body 250 (decorative body 269) at this time looks brighter than the initial state.

  Thereafter, when the rotation shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 (FIG. 6 and the like) is rotated in the reverse direction (left rotation), as described above, the first gear 261 is also rotated in the reverse direction via the second gear 262 and the third gear 263. The first slide member 265 and the first attachment member 267, and the second slide member 266 and the second attachment member 268 move in the approaching direction (see FIG. 12C). As a result, the decorative body 269 contracts in the left-right direction (is elastically deformed in such a manner that it is pressed from both the left-right directions). Then, the thickness of the decorative body 269 is increased, the light transmittance is decreased, and the light of the LED 275A is transmitted less. Therefore, the movable body 250 (the decorative body 269) at this time is in the state illustrated in FIG. Looks darker than the initial state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the decorative body 269 of the movable body 250 expands and contracts in the left-right direction as shown in FIGS. Since the brightness of 269 changes according to its own beating motion, the effect of production increases. Note that the luminance of the LED 275A may be changed depending on how the decorative body 269 is deformed. For example, when the light transmittance is high (FIG. 12B), the luminance is increased, and when the light transmittance is low (FIG. 12C), the luminance is decreased. Good. Thereby, the brightness of the decorative body 269 changes more greatly according to the heartbeat, and the effect of production can be enhanced. The light from the LED 256 </ b> A mounted on the LED board 256 illuminates the upper part of the decorative body 269. Therefore, in FIG. 12 showing the state of the front surface of the decorative body 269, the state of illumination by the LED 256A is not shown. On the other hand, the player can visually recognize the upper part of the decorative body 269 illuminated by the light from the LED 256A. At the upper part of the decorative body 269, the light transmittance changes as the decorative body 269 expands and contracts in the left-right direction. Therefore, the brightness of the light from the LED 256A also changes according to the movement of the decorative body 269 that beats.

(Structure of LED board 256, etc.)
13A and 13B are diagrams showing the LED substrate, in which FIG. 13A is a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 13B is a plan view seen from the arrow B in FIG. 14A and 14B are diagrams showing the LED substrate. FIG. 14A is a cross-sectional view taken along the cutting line XIVA-XIVA in FIG. 13B, and FIG. 14B is a cutting line XIVB-XIVB in FIG. FIG.

  The LED board 256 has a board body 256B, and a plurality of LEDs 256A and connectors 256C soldered to the board body 256B. Hereinafter, the plurality of LEDs 256A and the connector 256C may be collectively referred to as an electronic component 256D.

  The substrate body 256B has a shape that matches the shape of the curved upper surface of the base body 255 on which the substrate body 256B is installed. The substrate main body 256B includes curved portions 285 and 287 that are curved, and a non-curved portion 286 that is not curved. The curved portion 285 has a substantially bow-shaped curved shape in the cross section shown in FIG. 14A cut along a cutting line XIVA-XIVA parallel to the left-right direction. The curved portion 287 has a substantially line-symmetric shape with the curved portion 285 with respect to the center of the substrate body 256B, and has a substantially bow-shaped curved shape in a cross section taken along the cutting line XIVA-XIVA. Yes. The non-curved portion 286 connects both the curved portion 285 and the curved portion 287. The non-curved portion 286 is illustrated as a flat plate in a cross section taken along the cutting line XIVA-XIVA without being curved.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, the bending portion 285 is not curved in a cross section cut along a cutting line XIVB-XIVB (cutting line orthogonal to the cutting line XIVA-XIVA) parallel to the front-rear direction. It is illustrated in the shape. Similarly, the non-curved portion 286 and the curved portion 287 are not curved in a cross section cut by a cutting line parallel to the front-rear direction.

  In the LED board 256 in this embodiment, five LEDs 256A are soldered to the curved portion 285, and five LEDs 256A and one connector 256C are soldered to the curved portion 287. On the other hand, any electronic component 256D is not provided in the non-curved portion 286.

  Next, how to attach the electronic component 256D provided on the board body 256B will be described. 15A and 15B are diagrams showing an LED substrate, in which FIG. 15A is an enlarged view of “XVA part” in FIG. 13A, and FIG. 15B is a cross-sectional view as viewed from arrow B in FIG. ) Is a cross-sectional view as seen from the arrow C in (A).

  Each drawing in FIG. 15 focuses on one LED 256A provided on the substrate body 256B. As shown in FIG. 15A, the LED 256A has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is soldered to the mounting position Z0 on the board body 256B. The rectangular parallelepiped LED 256A can define a short direction having a short dimension and a long direction having a long dimension. In FIG. 15, orthogonal coordinates are defined in which the attachment position Z0 is the origin, the short direction of the LED 256A is the X axis direction, and the long direction is the Y axis direction. The LED 256A is soldered on the board body 256B so that the X-axis direction, which is the short direction, coincides with the left-right direction, and the Y-axis direction, which is the longitudinal direction, coincides with the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 15B, the substrate body 256B is curved in a cross-sectional view taken along a cross-sectional line parallel to the left-right direction. The LED 256A is mounted on the board body 256B so that the X axis, which is the short direction, coincides with a tangent line on the board body 256B passing through the attachment position Z0. FIG. 15B shows two tangent lines, and the first is a tangent line 288 that passes through the point Z1 on the substrate body 256B corresponding to the point X1 advanced in the −X axis direction from the point X0. . The second line is a tangent line 289 that passes through the point Z2 on the substrate body 256B corresponding to the point X2 advanced in the + X axis direction from the point X0. When the tangent line 288, the X axis, and the tangent line 289 on the substrate body 256B are viewed in order, the direction of the straight line gradually changes. From this, it can be seen that the substrate body 256B in the curved portion 285 has a curvature along the X-axis direction (the short direction of the LED 256A). Note that the magnitude of the curvature of the substrate body 256B in the X-axis direction can be determined by the degree of change in the direction of the tangent. If the change in the direction of the tangent is large, the degree of curvature of the substrate body 256B is large, and the curvature in the X-axis direction is large. On the other hand, if the change in the angle of the tangent is small, the degree of curvature of the substrate body 256B is small and the curvature in the X-axis direction is small.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15C, the substrate body 256B is not curved in the cross-sectional view taken along the cross-sectional line parallel to the front-rear direction. The LED 256A is provided on the substrate main body 256B so that the Y axis, which is the longitudinal direction, coincides with a tangent line on the substrate main body 256B that passes through the attachment position Z0. Further, in FIG. 15C, it corresponds to a tangent line passing through the point Z3 on the substrate body 256B corresponding to the point Y1 advanced from the point Y0 in the −Y axis direction, and a point Y2 advanced from the point Y0 in the + Y axis direction. A tangent line passing through the point Z4 on the substrate body 256B coincides with the Y axis. Thus, the direction of the tangent line on the substrate main body 256B in FIG. 15C does not change even if the position on the Y-axis is changed. Therefore, the curvature of the substrate body 256B in the Y-axis direction (longitudinal direction of the LED 256A) is zero.

  As described above, the LED 256A is soldered with the short side direction (X-axis direction) in the direction of large curvature and the long side direction (Y-axis direction) in the direction of small curvature at the mounting position Z0 on the board body 256B. ing. In particular, in the present embodiment, the short direction (X-axis direction) of the LED 256A is the direction in which the curvature is maximum at the mounting position Z0, the long side direction (Y-axis direction) of the LED 256A is the minimum in curvature at the mounting position Z0. In the same direction (the direction in which the curvature is 0). In addition, also in the electronic component 256D other than the LED 256A shown by the “XVA part” in FIG. 13A, in the mounting position on the board body 256B, the short side direction is a direction with a large curvature, and the long side direction is a direction with a small curvature. It is soldered so that it may face (the longitudinal direction faces the front-back direction).

(Overall operation of the rendering device 200)
The production using the production device 200 is executed at the time of super reach, for example. For example, as shown in FIG. 16, the effect control board 12 operates the movable body 250 at a predetermined timing of super reach. Specifically, by controlling the drive motor 257 and simultaneously controlling the drive motor 273, the decorative body 269 is expanded and contracted in the left-right direction (refer to the above for detailed operations), and the first character member 281 to the fourth character The distance between the members of the member 284 is increased or decreased (refer to the above for the detailed operation). Thereby, the operation (deformation of the movable body 250) as shown in FIGS. 16B and 16C is repeated. At this time, the effect control board 12 displays effect images EG1 and EG2 that emphasize that the movable body 250 is beating on the effect display device 5 in accordance with the deformation of the movable body 250.

  Thereafter, the effect control board 12 controls the drive mechanism 210 (drive motor 215) to move the movable body 250 to the advanced position after setting the movable body 250 to the initial state before deformation (detailed operations are described above). reference). At this time, the effect control board 12 displays the effect image EG3 that makes the drive motor 273 stand out on the effect display device 5 (FIG. 16D). At this time, the mode of the movable body 250 may be changed (the illumination of the decorative body 269, the deformation of the decorative body 269, the change of the LOVE character interval, etc.).

(Effects of this embodiment)
As in the above embodiment, the decorative body 269 is deformed by moving the left and right ends of the decorative body 269. Therefore, the decorative body 269 can be changed in an unprecedented form, and the production effect is improved. In this way, by applying force in a plurality of directions to the decorative body at a plurality of locations, the decorative body is changed to change the decorative body into a form in which the player is interested (for example, in a complicated manner). And the production effect can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the light transmittance of the decorative body 269 is changed by deforming the decorative body 269 (changing the thickness by deformation). Thereby, the brightness of the decorative body 269 that is illuminated later can be changed according to its shape. In particular, since the transmittance can be changed according to the degree of deformation of the decorative body 269, the brightness of the decorative body 269 can be continuously changed by continuously changing the shape of the decorative body 269. (Complicated control is unnecessary). Therefore, the effect of production can be improved.

  In addition, by changing the luminance of the LED 257A in accordance with the deformation of the decorative body 269, the effect due to the deformation of the decorative body 269 and the effect due to the light can be associated and executed at the same time, so that the effect can be improved. The production effect can be improved.

  In this embodiment, since the effect image EG1 and the like corresponding to the change of the decorative body 269 are displayed on the effect display device 5, the display image of the effect display device 5 can be interlocked with the deformation of the decorative body 269. The production effect can be improved.

  Further, the upward movement of the movable body 250 is assisted by the elastic body 229. Further, the elastic body 229 becomes a resistance against the movable body 250 moving downward. Thereby, the load on the drive motor 215 due to the weight of the movable body 250 can be reduced, and the movable body 250 can move smoothly in the vertical direction.

  In addition, the electronic component 256D on the curved board body 256B is soldered at the mounting position with the short direction facing the direction in which the curvature of the LED board 256 is large and the longitudinal direction facing the direction in which the curvature of the LED board 256 is small. Yes. Thereby, it can suppress that a crack arises in the solder which fixes electronic component 256D. Such an effect does not depend on the manufacturing process of the LED substrate, and in the LED substrate formed by soldering the electronic component to the curved substrate body, the electronic component such as the LED is soldered to the flat substrate body, and thereafter A similar effect is also obtained in an LED substrate formed by curving the substrate body.

  It is difficult in terms of cost and manufacturing to bend electronic parts such as LEDs in accordance with the shape of the curved substrate body. Therefore, an electronic component that is not curved is soldered to the substrate body, but an unavoidable gap is generated between the electronic component that is not curved and the curved substrate body. Due to this inevitable gap, when an electronic component is soldered to the curved substrate body, fixing by the solder becomes insufficient, or unexpected thermal stress or stress concentration occurs in the solder. Thereby, cracks are likely to occur in the solder for fixing the electronic component. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the gap between the electronic component and the substrate body is made small by directing the longitudinal direction of the electronic component in the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body is small. On the other hand, by arranging the short direction of the electronic component in the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body is large, the electronic component is arranged so that the gap is as small as possible even in the direction in which the large gap is generated. Thereby, soldering of an electronic component can be ensured, unexpected thermal stress and stress concentration can be reduced, and cracks generated in the solder can be suppressed.

  Next, a description will be given of a case where a curved LED substrate is formed by bending a flat substrate body to which electronic components are soldered. When the electronic component is soldered to the board main body on the flat plate, no gap is generated between the electronic component and the board main body, and the soldering is hardly defective. However, when the substrate body to which the electronic components are soldered is bent, a tensile region and a compression region are formed on the substrate body with the neutral axis as a boundary. At this time, the surface of the substrate body on the side of the tensile region is expanded, and the surface of the compressed region is contracted. However, electronic components and solder on the surface of the substrate body try to resist the expansion and contraction of the surface of the substrate body. Therefore, the solder tends to crack when the substrate body is bent. Therefore, in this embodiment, the electronic component is arranged so that the short direction coincides with the direction in which the surface is greatly expanded and contracted by bending the substrate body (the direction in which the tensile force or the compressive force acts and the direction in which the curvature is large). Is arranged. Thereby, the range which the surface of a board body restrains expansion and contraction can be made small, the stress which acts on solder can be reduced, and the crack which arises in solder can be controlled.

  Further, a substantially triangular cutout 269H and a cutout 269I are formed on the upper portion of the projecting portion 269E of the decorative body 269. When a force that compresses the decorative body 269 from the left-right direction is applied, the notch 269H and the notch 269I close the notched portion. Thereby, the decorative body 269 can be easily deformed by the compressive force from the left and right directions, and the operation of the decorative body 269 can be made natural.

  The first slide member 265 and the first attachment member 267 are connected in a state where the left end portion of the decorative body 269 is sandwiched, and the second slide member 266 and the second attachment member 268 are connected to the right end portion of the decorative body 269. Are connected in a state of sandwiching. As described above, by connecting the decorative body 269 in a sandwiched state, when the decorative body 269 is deformed, it is possible to suppress a problem that the decorative body 269 is broken due to stress concentration at a specific place. .

(Modification)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment and the like, and various modifications and applications can be made to the above embodiment and the like. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to include all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and a part described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with the following configuration. Although the modification of the said embodiment is illustrated below, at least one part of each modification can be combined unless a contradiction arises.

(Modification 1)
In the above, the driving of the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 and the deformation of the decorative body 269 are performed by separate independent mechanisms, but they may be interlocked. For example, the second rack portion 296 and the fourth rack member 298 are directly fixed to the through holes 269A and 269D of the decorative body 269, or fixed to the first mounting member 267 and the second mounting member 268, thereby the second rack. The sliding of the portion 296 and the fourth rack member 298 and the deformation of the decorative body 269 may be interlocked. In such a case, the drive motor 257 and various members that transmit the drive force of the drive motor 257 are not necessary. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily interlock a plurality of types of members used for production, and to enhance the production effect.

(Modification 2)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 may perform a so-called initial operation at the initial setting when the power is turned on. In the initial operation, (1) whether the movable body 250 is in an initial state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is normally powered off, it can be said that the movable body 250 is in the initial state), various sensors are used. When it is determined that the movable body 250 is not in the initial state, a process for returning the movable body 250 to the initial state is executed. The process of actually operating the movable body 250 or the like and returning it to the initial state in order to make the worker or the like visually check (for example, the same operation as when performing an effect using the movable body 250 or the like during a game) And a process for causing the movable body 250 or the like to perform at least one of the above. The initial state is, for example, (1) a state when no external force is applied to the decorative body 269 or the like, and (2) a normal state that is not abnormal (for example, a state when the power supply is normally turned on without any abnormality). The state before the decoration body 269 or the like is in operation in a state where the production or the like is not executed. Then, when performing an initial operation when the power is turned on (movement of the movable body 250, deformation of the decorative body 269, movement of the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284, etc.), the effect control board 12 displays the effect display device 5. In addition, an image that is displayed when the effect by the movable body 250 such as the effect image is executed is not displayed (for example, the effect display device 5 does not display an image or displays only a predetermined initial screen). Or display a recovery screen when power is restored.) Thereby, the visibility of the operation of the movable body 250 when the power is turned on can be improved (particularly, the above (2)).
During initial operation).

(Modification 3)
Even when the external force necessary for the deformation does not act during the deformation (for example, even when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like), the decorative body 269 is being deformed by the elastic force (restoring force). You may approach the initial state (initial shape) rather than a state. For example, a stepping motor having a weak detent torque may be used as the drive motor 257 to increase the elastic force of the decorative body 269 (the restoring force necessary to rotate the rotating shaft 257A of the drive motor 257 that is not turned on) It is good that the decorative body 269 has. The decorative body 269 and the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 may be brought closer to the initial state when the power is turned off by the force of an elastic body such as a spring provided in a mechanism for driving them. . The approach to the initial state includes both the return of the decorative body 269 to the initial state and the return to the state (shape) close to the initial state. If the decorative body 269 is brought close to the initial state to some extent, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience (for example, it becomes difficult for the decorative body 269 to return to the initial state due to unintended habits) due to the deformed decorative body 269 being left as it is.

(Modification 4)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 may include means for monitoring the voltage of the power source. In this case, when the voltage value of the power supply falls below a predetermined value, it is determined that a power interruption such as a power failure will occur, and the movable body 250 and the drive mechanism 210 are controlled to bring the rendering device 200 closer to the initial state. May be performed. The predetermined value may be a value that secures a voltage necessary for operating the movable body 250 and the drive mechanism 210 (various drive motors) (a value larger than a threshold value at the time of determining whether the power is cut off at the end). Would be good). For example, the effect control board 12 controls the drive motor 273 to bring the first slide member 265 and the first attachment member 267, the second slide member 266, and the second attachment member 268 closer to the original positions (moves to the initial position). And moving to the vicinity of the initial position). Thereby, the force in the direction of returning the decorative body 269 to the initial state can be applied to the decorative body 269, and the decorative body 269 can be brought close to the initial state (at this time, the first character member 281 to the fourth character). The member 284 may be brought close to the initial state). The explanation about “initial state” and “approach to the initial state” and the effect of the fourth modification are the same as those of the third modification. It should be noted that a backup power source or the like is provided, and after the power is cut off and no power is supplied from the outside, the effect control board 12 controls the drive motor 273 with the backup power source, and the first slide member You may make it make 265, the 1st attachment member 267, the 2nd slide member 266, and the 2nd attachment member 268 approach the original position. Note that the decorative body 269 may not be an elastic body, and in this case, the above-described processing for bringing the effect device 200 close to the initial state may be performed.

(Modification 5)
The decorative body 269 may be one in which a force acts in the vertical direction or the oblique direction, or may be one in which a force in three or more directions acts. The decorative body 269 may have a force acting in one direction. In addition, when applying force in a plurality of directions to the decorative body 269, the force in the plurality of directions may be applied simultaneously or at different timings. For example, a force may be applied to the right end of the decorative body 269 and then a force may be applied to the left end. The magnitude of the force in multiple directions may be the same, or at least one may be different from the others. The direction and the number of acting forces, the timing of action, and the like may be any one that matches the shape of the decorative body 269 (in the above embodiment, the shape of the decorative body 269 is a heart shape, so the decorative body 269 beats. In order to make it appear to be doing, force is applied simultaneously on the left and right).

  For example, the decorative body 269 may have only the state shown in FIG. 12B with the initial state shown in FIG. As described above, the decorative body 269 does not expand and contract from the initial state, but may perform only an operation extending from the initial state (which may be defined by a rotation angle of a drive motor or the like). Furthermore, for example, the decorative body 269 may have only the state illustrated in FIG. 12C with the initial state illustrated in FIG. Thus, the decorative body 269 may perform only the operation of contracting from the initial state (it may be defined by the rotation angle of the drive motor or the like).

(Modification 6)
For example, when the decorative body 269 extends and the light transmittance of the decorative body 269 is the first transmittance, the luminance of the LED 257A (illumination from the rear) is set to the first luminance, and the decorative body 269 contracts. When the light transmittance of the decorative body 269 is the second transmittance lower than the first transmittance, the luminance of the LED 257A may be set to the second luminance higher than the first luminance. For example, low luminance may be used in FIG. 12B, and high luminance may be used in FIG. In this way, for example, even if the decorative body 269 is deformed, the apparent brightness of the decorative body 269 may not be changed. Thereby, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, the speed of movement of the decorative body 269 (such as the speed of beating) may be changed, and the change in luminance of the LED 257A may be matched to the speed of the movement. For example, when the luminance (brightness) is changed in accordance with the movement (beat) of the decorative body 269, as the movement becomes faster, the change in the luminance is also advanced (the period of light and darkness is advanced), and as the movement becomes slower, The change in luminance may also be delayed (the light / dark cycle may be delayed). For example, by making the relationship between a certain state of the decorative body 269 and the luminance at that time always the same, the deformation cycle of the decorative body 269 and the luminance change cycle of the LED 257A can be matched. Thereby, the production effect can be enhanced. Note that the emission color of the LED 257A may be changed instead of or in addition to the change in luminance (such as the earlier the color is darker). Various modes (shape, color, blinking period, size, number of images, etc.) such as effect images EG1, EG2 displayed on the effect display device 5 may be changed according to the speed of movement of the decorative body 269. (The effect image may be changed to another image according to the speed of movement of the decorative body 269). Depending on the mode of movement of the decorative body 269 (direction of movement (stretching direction, etc.), amount of movement, speed of movement, etc.), the luminance and emission color (illumination color) of the LED 257A, the mode of the effect image, etc. are changed. Also good.

(Modification 7)
An effect using the effect device 200 may be executed in a notice effect, a pre-read notice, an effect in a big hit gaming state, or the like in addition to the effect of the super reach effect. An appropriate shape or the like of the movable body 250 can be adopted. The present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as slot machines and enclosed gaming machines.

(Modification 8)
The LED board 256 described above has a curvature in the left-right direction, but does not have a curvature in the front-rear direction orthogonal to the left-right direction. And the electronic component on a board | substrate main body is arrange | positioned toward the front-back direction where a curvature is zero. The present invention can be applied not only to a substrate having such a shape, but also to the case where an electronic component is soldered to a substrate having a curvature in any direction. 17A and 17B are diagrams showing another example of the LED substrate, in which FIG. 17A is a plan view and FIG. 17B is a sectional view taken along a cutting line BB in FIG. 18 is a view showing another example of the LED substrate, (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the cutting line XVIIIA-XVIIIA in FIG. 17 (A), and (B) is “B part” in (A). It is an enlarged view of "."

  The LED substrate 300 includes a substrate body 301 and a plurality of LEDs 302 and connectors 303 soldered to the substrate body 301 (hereinafter, these may be simply referred to as electronic components 304). .

  The substrate body 301 is rectangular in plan view, and the surface of the substrate body 301 is curved in any direction, which is different from the LED substrate 256 described above. The substrate main body 301 includes a high-curved section 311 that is largely curved and a low-curved section having a smaller curvature than the high-curved section 311 in the cross section shown in FIG. 17B cut along a cutting line BB parallel to the left-right direction. 310 and a low bending section 312. The low-curved section 310 and the low-curved section 312 have a line-symmetric relationship with respect to the center of the LED substrate 300. On the other hand, the substrate body 301 is also curved in the cross section shown in FIG. 18A cut along a cutting line XVIIIA-XVIIIA parallel to the front-rear direction. However, the degree of curvature is smaller than the degree of curvature in any section of the cross section shown in FIG. That is, the substrate body 301 of the LED substrate 300 has a curved surface having a large curvature of a section cut along a cutting line parallel to the left-right direction and a small curvature of a section cut along a cutting line parallel to the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, a short direction X1 and a long direction X2 are defined for the LED 302. The LED 302 is arranged so that the short direction X1 coincides with the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body 301 is large (FIG. 17B), and the longitudinal direction Y1 coincides with the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body 301 is small (FIG. 18 ( A)) Arranged. With such an arrangement of the LEDs 302, it is possible to suppress cracks that occur in the solder that fixes the LEDs 302, as in the above embodiment.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17A, a short direction X2 and a long direction Y2 are defined for the connector 303. The connector 303 has a dimension in the short side direction and a dimension in the long side direction larger than each dimension of the LED 302. The connector 303 is arranged such that the short direction X2 coincides with the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body 301 is large (FIG. 17B), and the longitudinal direction Y2 coincides with the direction in which the curvature of the substrate body 301 is small (FIG. 17). (A)) Arranged. Thereby, the crack which arises in the solder which fixes the connector 303 can be suppressed. Further, as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 17B, the connector 303 is soldered to the low bending section 312 having a small curvature and is not soldered to the high bending section 311. As described above, the various dimensions of the connector 303 are larger than the dimensions of the LED 302. Therefore, in order to make the gap between the connector 303 and the board body 301 smaller, it is soldered to a portion having a small curvature. This does not exclude that the LED 302 is soldered to the low curvature section 312. That is, electronic components with smaller dimensions are allowed to be soldered to locations with larger curvatures. On the other hand, as the electronic component has a larger size, the soldered portion is limited to a portion having a smaller curvature.

  In addition, although LED and a connector were demonstrated to the example as an electronic component soldered to a board | substrate, this invention is applied also when soldering a transistor, a resistor, a diode, a capacitor | condenser etc. as another electronic component, for example. be able to.

(Modification 9)
Moreover, in the above-mentioned LED board, since the direction with a large curvature and the direction with a small curvature match between the attachment locations of a plurality of electronic components, each electronic component also regularly aligns the longitudinal direction with the front-rear direction. Had been soldered. However, the present invention can also be applied to a substrate in which the substrate body is twisted and curved in various directions. In this case as well, the electronic component may be soldered so that the longitudinal direction coincides with the large curvature direction and the short direction coincides with the small curvature direction at the mounting position of the electronic component.

(Modification 10)
As shown in FIG. 18B, in the curved LED substrate 300, the wiring 330 on the surface on the bent portion 301a side and the wiring 340 on the surface on the bent portion 301b side are made different in form. May be. Here, the bending portion 301a refers to a portion where a tensile force acts on the neutral axis when the substrate body 301 is bent, and the contraction portion 301b refers to a compressive force acting on the neutral axis. Say part. The wiring 330 on the surface of the extended portion 301a receives a tensile force when the LED substrate 300 is bent, and receives a thermal stress when the electronic component is soldered. In order to suppress the occurrence of defects such as breakage in the wiring 330 due to these external forces, the respective cross sections of the wiring 330 arranged on the bent portion 301a side are arranged on the bent portion 301b side. The cross section of the wiring 340 is made larger. Thereby, it can suppress that the crack is produced in the solder 320 when the wiring 330 is disconnected. On the other hand, a compressive force mainly acts on the wiring 340 on the surface on the side of the bent portion 301b. However, the wiring 340 is unlikely to be broken due to the compressive force. Therefore, each cross section of the wiring 340 arranged on the bent portion 301b side can be made smaller than the cross section of the wiring 330 on the bent portion 301a side.

  Note that the difference between the cross section of the wiring 330 and the cross section of the wiring 340 is not limited to the case where the substrate is different in a curved state as illustrated in FIG. For example, in a flat substrate before bending, the cross-section is made different by the amount of expansion and contraction of the wiring, and then the wiring of the extension portion and the wiring of the bending portion have substantially the same cross-section when the substrate is bent thereafter. It is good also as a simple structure. Further, as a difference in wiring between the bent portion and the bent portion, not only the size of the cross section of one wire but also the number of wires, the material of the wires, and the like may be varied. For example, the cross section of each wiring may be made the same size at the bent portion and the bent portion, and the number of wires in the bent portion may be larger than the number of wires in the bent portion. Further, the wiring of the extended portion may be formed using a material that is easier to extend than the wiring of the reduced portion. In addition, when soldering an electronic component to each of the bent portion and the bent portion, the amount of solder of the electronic component arranged in the bent portion is determined by the amount of solder of the electronic component arranged in the bent portion. May be increased. Thereby, the crack which generate | occur | produces in a solder can be suppressed.

(Modification 11)
Moreover, in the LED board provided in the gaming machine according to the present invention, appropriate arrangement of electronic components capable of suppressing solder cracks can be realized by considering the function and performance of the electronic components to be mounted. 19A and 19B are diagrams for explaining another example of the LED substrate. FIG. 19A is a diagram in which electronic components are arranged without considering the curvature of the substrate body, and FIG. 19B is an electronic diagram from the arrangement in FIG. It is the figure which changed arrangement etc. of parts. A substrate body 401a shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B has the same shape as the substrate body 301 shown in FIG. In other words, the LED substrate 400 a has a high-curved section 411 that is greatly curved, and a low-curved section 410 and a low-curved section 412 that have a smaller curvature than the high-curved section 411. Further, the substrate body 401 a is curved in the front-rear direction, but the degree of the curvature is smaller than that of the low-curved section 410 and the low-curved section 412.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, LEDs 420a to 420g, resistors 430a to 430b, and LEDs 421a to 421c are mounted on the substrate body 401a of the LED substrate 400a. The LEDs 421a to 421c have higher brightness of emitted light and larger dimensions than the LEDs 420a to 420g. The resistors 430a and 430b have the same resistance value and the same dimensions. Here, for example, it is determined that the solder that fixes the electronic components in the low-curved section 410 and the low-curved section 412 has a low possibility of cracking because the degree of curvature of the substrate body 401a is small, and the high-curved section 411 Assume that it is determined that a solder for fixing a certain LED 420c to 420e has a low possibility of cracking because the size of the electronic component itself is small. On the other hand, it is assumed that the solder that fixes the LED 421b and the resistors 430a and 430b in the highly curved section 411 is determined to have a high possibility of cracking. In this case, it is necessary to take measures for changing the type and arrangement of the electronic components shown in FIG.

  In the solder which fixes LED420a-420g, since possibility that a crack will arise is low, it is not necessary to change the position and kind of electronic component. However, as shown in FIG. 19B, an LED 422a may be provided at an intermediate position instead of the LED 420a and the LED 420b. Thus, the LED 422a to be arranged instead is selected from those that emit light having the same luminance as the combined luminance of the light emitted from the LED 420a and the LED 420b. The LED 422a is an LED that is larger in size than the LED 420a and the LED 420b, but is determined to be less susceptible to cracks in the solder in the low-curved section 410. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 19B, an LED 422b may be provided at an intermediate position instead of the LED 420f and the LED 420g.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, four LEDs 422a can be provided instead of the LEDs 421b provided in the high-curved section 411, which are likely to crack in the solder to be fixed. These LEDs 422a are selected from the LEDs whose luminance is the same as the luminance of the light emitted from the LED 421b alone. The dimensions of the four LEDs 422a are smaller than the dimensions of the LEDs 421b, and the possibility of cracking in the solder to be fixed is low. In this way, by replacing a large-sized LED (electronic component) with a plurality of small-sized LEDs (electronic component) without reducing the brightness of the light as a whole (without reducing the function), soldering can be performed. The crack which arises in can be suppressed. The small-sized LED 422a is mounted around the mounting position of the substitute LED 421b. Therefore, the mode of light emitted from the four LEDs 422a and the mode of light emitted from the LED 421b alone can be made the same.

  In addition, when it is determined that there is a high possibility of cracks occurring in the solder for fixing the resistor 430a provided in the high bending section 411, the cracks are generated by changing the wiring formed on the substrate body 401a. The resistor 430a can be moved to a position where it is difficult to perform. That is, as shown in FIG. 19B, the mounting position of the resistor 430a is changed from the high bending section 411 to the low bending section 410. As a result, it is possible to suppress cracks that occur in the solder that fixes the resistor 430a.

  Also, unlike the resistor 430a, when it is difficult to change the mounting position, a plurality of small resistors can be substituted without changing the mounting position. As shown in FIG. 19B, two small resistors 431a can be provided instead of the resistor 430b provided in the high-curved section 411 where the solder is likely to crack. The two resistors 431a provided instead are selected from those having a combined resistance value that is approximately the same as the resistance value of the resistor 430b to be substituted. The size of the resistor 431a is smaller than the size of the resistor 430b, and the possibility of cracking in the solder is low. In this way, by replacing the resistor (electronic component) having a large size with a plurality of resistors (electronic components) having a small size without changing the resistance value as a whole (without changing the function), Cracks generated in the solder can be suppressed.

  As described above, changing the electronic component having a large size to a plurality of electronic components having a small size to suppress the cracking may result in forming a curved portion in the substrate main body particularly at the design stage of the LED substrate. In the case where the degree of bending is changed or an unexpected crack occurs after manufacturing, the solder crack can be dealt with without making a large design change. As described above, as an electronic component capable of dealing with solder cracks, it is possible to deal with not only the above-described LED and resistor, but also, for example, a capacitor and a connector.

(Configuration etc. taking at least a part of the above embodiment as an example)
Next, a description will be given of a configuration taking at least a part of the above-described embodiments and modifications as an example, and further modifications. The following configurations may be omitted as appropriate, or only a part may be adopted. A gaming machine may be configured. Moreover, you may combine at least one part of each structure.

  (1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) has a curved portion (for example, a curved portion 285, a curved portion 287) whose surface is curved, and an electronic component ( For example, the electronic component includes a board (for example, LED board 256, LED board 300) on which a mounting position (for example, mounting position Z0) of LED 256A and connector 256C) is set, and the electronic component has a short direction at the mounting position. The LED 256A is mounted so that the curvature direction of the board body 256B is large (as shown in FIG. 15B, for example). A gaming machine characterized by that.

  (2) Wiring is provided on the front surface (for example, the surface of the LED substrate 300 on the side of the bent portion 301a) and the back surface (for example, the surface of the LED substrate 300 on the side of the bent portion 301b). In the portion, the wiring patterns of the front surface and the back surface may be different (for example, as shown in FIG. 18B, the wiring 330 and the wiring 340 have different cross-sectional sizes).

  (3) A plurality of types of electronic component mounting locations are set on the substrate (for example, as shown in FIG. 17, electronic components such as an LED 302 and a connector 303 are mounted on the LED substrate 300. ), Among the plurality of types of electronic components, the electronic component having a short short-side direction is attached to the attachment portion having a larger maximum curvature value (for example, the LED 302 having a short short-side direction is The connector 303 is attached to the high bending section 311 having a large curvature, but the connector 303 having a long short side direction is not attached to the high bending section 311 but is attached to the low bending section 312).

(4) a specific decorative body (for example, a decorative body 269, etc.) that performs a rendering operation by being deformed by receiving a force;
A first action means (for example, a first slide member 265 and a first attachment member 267) that applies a force to the specific decorative body in a first direction (for example, left direction); Second action means (for example, a second slide member 266 and a second attachment member 268) for applying a force in a second direction (for example, the right direction) different from the first direction,
It is possible for both the first action means and the second action means to exert a force on the specific decorative body during a predetermined period (for example, the first slide member 265 and the first attachment member 267, and the second slide). The member 266 and the second mounting member 268 simultaneously slide to deform the decorative body 269, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

(5) a specific decorative body (for example, a decorative body 269, etc.) that performs a rendering operation by being deformed by receiving a force;
Action means (for example, the first slide member 265 and the first attachment member 267) for applying a force to the specific decorative body;
A light emitting means (for example, a first slide member 265 and a first attachment member 267) that irradiates light from the back side of the specific decorative body,
Due to the action of the action means, the amount of light transmitted through the specific decorative body changes (for example, the decorative body 269 is elastically deformed so as to be pulled left and right, thereby changing its thickness and changing the light transmittance. Etc.),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Each action means in the above (4) and (5) may be anything that presses, pulls, or otherwise acts on the decorative body. The action direction may be any of the left-right direction, the front-rear direction, the up-down direction, or a combination thereof (oblique direction).

  In the above (5), “the amount of transmitted light changes” includes the fact that the specific decorative body is physically deformed by the action of the action means and the thickness thereof changes.

  (6) The light emitting unit may emit light by a light emission pattern corresponding to the effect operation of the specific decorative body (for example, the luminance of the LED 275A is changed in accordance with changing the decorative body 269). .

(7) A special decorative body (for example, a first character member 281 to a fourth character member 284) provided on the front side of the specific decorative body is provided,
At least one of the first action means and the second action means causes the force to act on the specific decorative body by driving the special decorative body and executing an effect operation, or the action means May apply a force to the specific decorative body (for example, Modification 1) by driving the special decorative body to execute the effect operation.

  The special decorative body does not have to represent a character or the like, and may produce an effect by deforming without including a character or the like like the decorative body 269. The special decorative body may be composed of a plurality of members. Each of the first action means and the second action means may apply a force to each of a plurality of members constituting the special decorative body.

(8) Provided with a display device (for example, the effect display device 5) for effect display,
The display device may perform a corresponding display corresponding to the effect operation of the specific decorative body (see, for example, FIG. 16).

  The “corresponding display corresponding to the effect operation of the specific decorative object” may be anything that constitutes an effect with the effect operation of the specific decorative object and the image displayed by the corresponding display.

  (9) When operating the specific decorative body as the power is turned on, the correspondence display may not be executed (for example, Modification 2). The power-on may be due to a reset or the like.

  (10) The specific decorative body may have elasticity and approach an initial shape by a restoring force when the external force stops working in the deformed state (for example, Modification 3).

(11) When power supply is stopped in a state where the specific decorative body is deformed, the first action means and the second action means apply force in a direction to return the specific decorative body to the initial shape (for example, deformation Example 4), or
When the power supply is stopped in a state where the specific decorative body is deformed, the action means may apply a force in a direction to return the specific decorative body to the initial shape (for example, Modification 4).

  When power supply is stopped, it includes both when the power supply voltage before the power supply is stopped is detected and when power supply is actually stopped.

(Circuit structure of the LED board 275 of the movable body 250)
Next, a circuit configuration of the LED substrate 275 of the movable body 250 will be described. FIG. 20 is a front view illustrating a state in which the cover body is removed from the movable body. FIG. 21 is a detailed view showing the LED substrate 275 provided inside the movable body 250. 21A shows a component mounting surface (front surface) on which various surface mounting components such as a plurality of LED elements and protective resistors are mounted, and FIG. 21B shows the back surface (also referred to as a solder surface). It is.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the shape of the LED substrate 275 will be described. The LED substrate 275 has a substantially heart shape according to the shape of the movable body 250, and as described above, the cover It can be fixed to the front of the body 271 without protruding from the cover body 271.

  In the central portion of the LED substrate 275, as described above, the drive motor 257 for deforming the decorative body 269 made of synthetic rubber covering the front surface of the movable body 250 and the interval between the character members of “LOVE” are changed. A large notch 275B for disposing the drive motor 273 is formed so as to substantially cut the central portion of the LED substrate 275 in the vertical direction, and is slightly below the center corresponding to the first rack member 295. Has a horizontally long shape so as not to hinder the movement of the second character member 282.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 21, the LED substrate 275 has a first region on the right side of the LED substrate 275 and a second region on the left side of the LED substrate 275 separated by the notch 275B. The second region is significantly narrower than the first region and the second region, and has a special shape electrically and mechanically connected by a connection region 275C formed below the notch 275B.

  275D is an insertion hole for preventing a member protruding forward from the back side of the LED board 275 from coming into contact with the LED board 275.

  On the component mounting surface (front surface) of the LED board 275, a large number of LEDs 275A are mounted uniformly over the entire surface so that the player can see that the entire decorative body 269 is emitting light. The turning on / off of the LED 275A is controlled by the LED driving IC 602 mounted in the second area. Note that the LED 275A is also mounted in the connection region 275C so that the lower end portion of the decorative body 269 is not darker than the other portions.

  On the component mounting surface (front surface) of the LED substrate 275, not only a large number of LEDs 275A but also protective resistors for limiting the current supplied to the LEDs 275A, diodes, capacitors, and the like are mounted.

  The LED driving IC 602 emits not only a large number of LEDs 275A mounted on the component mounting surface (front surface) but also each “LOVE” character member such as the LED board 283B of the “V” third character member 283. In order to achieve this, each LED board provided inside the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 is also connected via the connector 650, and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED mounted on each LED board is also controlled. To do. Therefore, on the component mounting surface (front surface), the connection connector 650 with each LED board provided in the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 is also cut into the first region and the second region, respectively. The notches 275 </ b> B are mounted one by one so as to face the part having a horizontally long shape.

(Characteristic configuration of connector mounting pattern)
Here, the connector 650 mounted in the first region and the second region, and the electrode (mounting pattern) on which the connector 650 is mounted will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In FIG. 21, the electrodes (mounting patterns) on which the connectors 650 are mounted are enlarged, and FIG. 24 shows these electrodes (mounting patterns) and the connectors 650 mounted on the electrodes (mounting patterns). It is shown in enlarged view in a perspective view.

  In the present embodiment, as the electrodes (mounting pattern) for mounting the connector 650 on the LED substrate 275, as shown by the black portions in the enlarged view of FIG. 24) and the metal fixing portions 651 formed at the lower ends at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the connector 650 are fixed to the LED substrate 275 by soldering as shown in FIG. Two fixing pads P are formed so as to correspond to the respective terminals and the metal fixing portion 651.

  In the present embodiment, among the seven terminals of the connector 650, only four terminals from No. 1 to No. 4 are used, and three terminals from No. 5 to No. 7 are not used. Therefore, these three unused terminals are connected to the GND pattern so that the potential is indefinite and noise or the like does not enter. Further, a two-dot chain line in the enlarged view of FIG. 21 indicates a region occupied by the mounted connector.

  Between the terminal pattern and the fixed pad P, a GND pattern is formed so as to surround a wiring pattern that connects each terminal pattern and a through hole covered with a connector to be mounted. Thus, in order to surround the wiring pattern, the GND pattern between the terminal pattern of the first terminal and the fixed pad P is an extremely narrow constriction N.

  For this reason, the electrical connection between the GND pattern located immediately below the connector CN connected by the narrowed portion N and the GND pattern not located directly below the connector CN is lowered, and the potential of the GND pattern located immediately below the connector CN is reduced. Are likely to change, and the noise reduction capability of these GND patterns may be reduced.

  In particular, since the three unused terminal patterns are connected to the GND pattern located immediately below the connector CN as described above, the reduction in the noise reduction capability of the GND pattern located directly below the connector CN is as follows. There is a possibility that the noise reduction capability of the three unused terminal patterns will be reduced, and the adverse effects of noise on the circuits connected to the four used terminals may increase.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the fixed pad P is grounded by connecting the GND pattern surrounding the fixed pad P and the fixed pad P by the three bridge patterns BR. By doing in this way, the GND pattern located immediately below the connector CN connected by the narrowed portion N and the GND pattern not located directly below the connector CN are also electrically connected via the fixed pad P and the bridge pattern BR. As a result, the noise reduction capability of the GND pattern located immediately below the connector CN is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the other fixed pad P not surrounded by the GND pattern is connected to the GND pattern by only one bridge pattern BR. However, the number and shape of these bridge patterns BR are as follows. The other fixed pad P may not be connected to the GND pattern depending on the state of the wiring pattern. That is, in the present embodiment, an example in which all of the plurality (two) of the fixed pads P are electrically connected to the GND pattern is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of (two) Among the fixed pads P), some of the fixed pads P may not be electrically connected to the GND pattern.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the surface mount type connector 650 and the LED substrate 275 are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a through hole type connector and a substrate.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the connector 650 of the type in which the attachment is inserted / removed in the vertical direction with respect to the board surface to be mounted is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as shown in FIG. 25, as long as it has a metal fixing portion 651 ′, it may be a connector 650 ′ of a type that inserts and removes the attachment along the board surface, and has a metal fixing portion. Any type may be used.

  In this embodiment, connector 650 is illustrated as a specific electronic component having a metal fixing portion. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these specific electronic components have a metal fixing portion. For example, a socket for mounting a backup electric double layer capacitor, a battery, or a memory card, an electronic component such as a SAW filter or a dielectric coil, a TSOP package, etc. It may be a package IC having a metal fixing part.

  In this embodiment, no through hole is provided in the fixed pad P. However, through the through hole, a GND pattern other than the substrate surface, such as a solder surface or the like, is provided. If the substrate is a multilayer substrate, the area occupied by the through hole may be suppressed by connecting to the GND pattern of the layer inside the substrate as compared with the case where the through hole is individually formed.

  In the present embodiment, the pattern in which the fixed pad P is electrically connected is exemplified as the GND pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pattern adjacent to the fixed pad P is Since power supply patterns such as VCC, VDL, and VSL, which will be described later, are connected to the power supply patterns such as VCC, VDL, and VSL, the effect of reducing noise and the like can be obtained in the same manner as the GND pattern. , VDL, VSL, etc. may be connected.

  In addition, the motor drive IC 601 for driving the drive motors 257 and 273 disposed inside the notch 275B, the drive motors 257 and 273, and the LED substrate 275 are connected to the upper center position of the first region. Two connectors CN for mounting are mounted. For these connectors CN as well as the connector 650 described above, the fixing pads on which the metal fixing portions of the connectors CN are mounted are connected to the GND pattern.

  The motor drive IC 601 mounted in the first area and the LED drive IC 602 mounted in the second area receive the serial control signal including the operation instruction and the like output from the effect control board 12, thereby the LED 275 </ b> A. And the like, and the rotation / stop of the drive motors 257 and 273 are controlled.

  A connector 603 having 13 connection terminals for connecting the LED substrate 275 and the substrate 253 is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) of the connection region 275C. As described above, the connector 603 is mounted on the back surface by reducing the length of the wiring by mounting on the surface facing the substrate 253 disposed on the rear side of the movable body 250 as described above. In addition, because the LED 275A is mounted on the component mounting surface (front surface) of the connection region 275C, the connector 603 cannot be mounted.

  In addition, the connector 603 can insert / extract the attachment element | device with which the edge part of the connection electric wire was mounted | worn from the downward side of the LED board 275, in order to make the assembly of the movable body 250 easy and to prevent the disconnection in an assembly. It is supposed to be.

  As described above, the serial control signal output from the effect control board 12 by being connected to the board 253 by the connector 603 is transmitted to the motor driving IC 601 and the LED driving IC 602 via the board 253 and the connector 603. It is transmitted through the wiring on H.275.

  Here, a signal allocation form for each connection terminal in the connector 603 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a signal allocation form after improvement used in this embodiment, and FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a signal allocation form before improvement.

  In FIGS. 22 and 23, the left side of the drawing is the mounting portion of the connector No. 1 terminal, and the right side of the drawing is the mounting portion of the connector No. 13 (No. 12 in FIG. 23). The numbers correspond to “1” to “13” (“12” in FIG. 23) of the connectors in the circuit diagrams of FIGS. 22B and 23B.

  As shown in FIG. 23 (B), the assignment of signals to the terminals of these connectors is usually shown in a circuit diagram in which a control circuit such as a large number of LEDs is given priority over a control circuit such as a drive motor. And assigning the signals transmitted to the control circuits such as LEDs to the higher-order (low number) terminals, so that the signal lines from the connector to each control circuit do not cross each other, and there are a plurality of control signals. In some cases, it is common to group other control signals together without interposing other signals, and assign other power terminals to lower-numbered terminals. When implemented, there appears to be no problem on the wiring diagram.

  However, when the board is actually manufactured, as shown in FIG. 23A, since the connector 603 is mounted on the back surface of the connection region 275C, it is transmitted to the LED driving IC 602 mounted in the second region. LED drive serial signal pattern wirings L2 and L3 (ASIBADDT, ASIBACLK) are assigned to “2” and “3” terminals located on the opposite side of the second region, and The terminals of the motor driving serial signal pattern wirings L5 and L6 (S1TXD, S1SCK) transmitted to the motor driving IC 601 mounted in the first area are also assigned to the LED driving serial signal pattern wirings L2 and L3. LED terminals are assigned to “5” and “6” terminals that are farther away than the “2” and “3” terminals. The length of the wiring pattern on the H.275 becomes longer and is more susceptible to noise, and interference between the LED driving serial signal pattern wirings L2 and L3 and the motor driving serial signal pattern wirings L5 and L6 is prevented. For this reason, the pattern becomes complicated such that the drawing direction of the pattern is different for each serial signal. In other words, redundant signal pattern wirings increase and malfunctions may occur due to noise or the like generated by these redundant signal pattern wirings.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 22 (A), the improved signal assignment form is characterized by the pattern wiring L2 of the motor drive serial signal transmitted to the motor drive IC 601 mounted in the first area. , L3 (S1TXD, S1SCK) are assigned to the “2” and “3” terminals close to the first area and transmitted to the LED driving IC 602 mounted in the second area. LED driving serial signal pattern wirings L11 and L12 (ASIBADDT, ASIBACLK) are assigned to the terminals “11” and “12” close to the second area.

  Note that “1” closest to the first area and “13” closest to the second area are connected to the “4” terminal and the “11” terminal adjacent to the “3” terminal. The reason why “GND” is set together with the adjacent “10” terminal is to reduce the adverse effects of noise on the pattern wirings L2 and L3 of the motor driving serial signal and the pattern wirings L11 and L12 of the LED driving serial signal. If the adverse effect due to noise is low, for example, the two terminals of the pattern wirings L2 and L3 of the motor driving serial signal are assigned to the "1" and "2" terminals, and the LED driving serial signal is assigned. These two terminals may be assigned to the “12” and “13” terminals.

  That is, in order to prevent malfunction due to noise or the like caused by redundant signal pattern wiring, a game is possible, and a first area and a second area where electronic components such as a motor driving IC 601 and an LED driving IC 602 are mounted, In the pachinko gaming machine 1 including the LED board 275 that is an area located between the first area and the second area and has a connection area 275C narrower than the first area and the second area, the connection area 275C includes a first signal pattern wiring (pattern wirings L2 and L3) for transmitting a first electric signal to the motor driving IC 601 mounted in the first area, and an LED driving mounted in the second area. A plurality of connection terminals connected to each of the second signal pattern wirings (pattern wirings L11, L12) for transmitting the second electric signal to the IC 602 The connector 603 (specific electronic component) is mounted, the first signal pattern wiring is connected to the terminal on the first region side of the connector 603 (specific electronic component) mounted in the connection region 275C, and the second The second signal pattern wiring may be connected to the terminal on the region side.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the motor drive serial signal and the LED drive serial signal are assigned by assigning the terminal between the motor drive serial signal terminal and the LED drive serial signal terminal to various power terminals. The signal is isolated by various power terminals, and it is possible to prevent the motor driving serial signal and the LED driving serial signal from interfering with each other.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22B, VCC (DC5V generated by the power supply IC) for operating the motor driving IC 601 and the LED driving IC 602 at the terminals “5” and “9” is provided. ), VDL (DC12V generated by the power supply IC) is provided to the terminals of “6” and “7”, and the first character member 281 to the fourth character member 284 are provided to the “8” terminal. VSL (DC power obtained by rectifying and smoothing AC24V) supplied to LEDs mounted on each LED board is assigned.

  Note that the “5” terminal close to the first region of the connector 603, that is, the “5” terminal on the first region side of the connector 603 is connected to the motor drive IC 601 mounted in the first region. The “9” terminal connected to the power supply pattern wiring for supplying VCC and close to the second area of the connector 603 supplies the operating power VCC to the LED driving IC 602 mounted in the second area. The power supply pattern wiring is connected to the power supply pattern wiring to be supplied. In this manner, redundant pattern wiring is reduced for the power supply pattern wiring.

  In this embodiment, although the LED board 275 is a multilayer board, a signal wiring pattern for transmitting a motor driving serial signal and an LED driving serial signal, a terminal “5”, and “9” The wiring board for power supply to which power such as VCC is supplied and power such as VCC is connected to the multilayer substrate is formed in the same layer, but the present invention is not limited to this, By using a multi-layer board in which the signal wiring pattern and the power supply wiring pattern are formed in different layers, the adverse effects of noise, etc. from the power supply wiring pattern on the signal wiring pattern are reduced. You may make it do.

  Similarly to the connector 650 described above, the surface-mounted connector 603 has two metal fixing portions (not shown) for fixing the connector 603 to the LED board 275 by soldering at both lower portions in the longitudinal direction. On the solder surface of the LED substrate 275, a fixing pad P for soldering the metal fixing portion is formed at a position corresponding to the metal fixing portion.

  These fixed pads P are formed in a larger area than the first to thirteenth terminals in order to firmly fix the connector 603 to the LED substrate 275, and the fixed pads P formed in these wide areas In order not to obstruct the wiring pattern, unlike before the improvement shown in FIG. 23, the LED substrate 275 is formed on the outer peripheral side, that is, on the side opposite to the first region and the second region.

  Furthermore, these fixed pads P are electrically connected to GND terminals which are terminals “1”, “4”, “10”, and “13”, and “5” to “9”. GND surrounds the power supply patterns of VCC, VDL, and VSL supplied at the terminal No., and in this way, the motor is driven by noise from the power supply patterns of VCC, VDL, and VSL. “2” and “3” terminals to which the pattern wirings L2 and L3 to the IC 601 are connected, and “11” and “12” to which the pattern wirings L11 and L12 to the LED driving IC 602 are connected. Can be further reduced, and the electrical capacitance of the GND can be improved. Therefore, the “1”, “4”, “10”, “13” GND Noise reduction capability by terminals is even more It is Mel possible.

  In the present embodiment, the fixed pad P is connected to GND. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, the fixed pad P is connected to VCC, VDL, You may make it connect with any power supply pattern of VSL.

  In this embodiment, the specific electronic component mounted in the connection region 275C is exemplified as a connector. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific electronic component includes a plurality of specific electronic components. For example, an integrated circuit (IC) having a plurality of terminals at different positions, for example, a motor driving serial signal (S1TXD, S1SCK) or an LED driving serial signal (ASIBADT, ASIBACLK) is transmitted. It may be a serial signal IC device capable of (output).

  In this embodiment, the second and third terminals to which the motor drive serial signals (S1TXD and S1SCK) are assigned and the LED drive serial signals (ASIBADDT and ASIBACLK) are assigned. By assigning the “4” and “10” terminals located between the “11” and “12” terminals to the GND, the influence of noise or the like is further reduced. The invention is not limited to this, and GND may not be assigned to a terminal between the terminal to which the motor driving serial signal is assigned and the terminal to which the LED driving serial signal is assigned. .

  In this embodiment, the terminal between the terminal to which the motor driving serial signal is allocated and the terminal to which the LED driving serial signal is allocated is used as a power source terminal such as VCC, and the motor is driven. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the motor driving serial signals are assigned. The terminal between the assigned terminal and the terminal to which the LED driving serial signal is assigned may not be the power terminal.

(Modification 12)
Here, Modification 12 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a circuit configuration as Modification 12 of the present invention.

  (Board noise countermeasure 1)

  For example, in the above-described rendering device 200 or the like, electronic components (for example, motor driving IC 601, driving motors 257, 273, LED driving IC 602, LED 275A) in which noise or static electricity is mounted or connected to the LED substrate 275 of the movable body 250 are used. If this is adversely affected, the electronic component may malfunction.

  Therefore, as a noise countermeasure, for example, the boss 844C is not subjected to plating (or metal vapor deposition) on the boss 844C adjacent to the substrate 801 in the first effect body 800 described with reference to FIGS. 26 to prevent the front LED 810 and the LED driving IC connected to the front LED 810 from being destroyed by the discharge due to the discharge from the LED to the front LED 810 close to the boss 844C. In the case where an electronic component such as the front LED 810 (angle LED) is mounted at a position close to the boss 844C as in the present modification 12, the outer peripheral ground X is formed along the outer periphery of the substrate, and the periphery of the electronic component is A solid ground electrode Y having a relatively large area is provided so as to surround the inside of the solid ground electrode Y. By mounting electronic components and electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the solid ground electrode Y at one connection point on the board 801, for example, one terminal of the board-side connector KCN, for example, from the boss 844C Even if a discharge occurs, mounting parts such as the front LED 810 and the LED driving IC may be prevented from being destroyed or malfunctioning.

  In the above-described modification 12, the outer peripheral ground X and the solid ground electrode Y are electrically connected at one terminal of the board-side connector KCN, thereby electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the solid ground electrode Y. Although wiring on the mounting board can be reduced, the outer peripheral ground X and the solid ground electrode Y may be electrically connected at one connection point on the board different from the board-side connector KCN. The outer peripheral ground X and the solid ground electrode Y are electrically connected to another substrate connected via the board-side connector KCN, or the outer peripheral ground X and the solid ground electrode Y have a sufficient area or the like. In the case where the influence by the noise signal is low, the outer peripheral ground X and the solid ground electrode Y are not electrically connected, A ground X and the solid ground electrodes Y may be reduced wiring on the mounting board for electrical connection.

  Further, as described above, the modified example 12 may be performed together with a measure for not performing the plating process (or metal vapor deposition) on the boss 844C. That is, both the above-described countermeasure by the outer peripheral ground X and the solid ground electrode Y and the countermeasure not to perform the plating process (or metal deposition) on the boss 844C may be implemented, or only one of the countermeasures may be performed. Also good.

  In the case where the shape of the substrate 801 can be changed, for example, the boss 844C and the substrate 801 are formed so that the distance between the boss 844C and the substrate 801 is separated by a sufficient distance (specific distance) that is difficult to cause discharge. May be separated by a specific distance.

  When the boss 844C is subjected to plating (or metal deposition), an electrically insulating member is interposed between the boss 844C subjected to the plating (or metal deposition) and the substrate 801. Thus, discharge from the boss 844C to the substrate 801 may be prevented.

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the modified example 12 of the present invention, at least a part of the bosses 844A to 844E of the decorative member 803 as a conductive member having conductivity and an electronic component (for example, the front LED 810) , 812, 813, etc.) as a mounting substrate on which the bosses 844A to 844E are disposed adjacent to the outer periphery of the substrate 801, and the substrate 801 is close to the electronic component to be mounted. A solid ground electrode Y as a first ground region formed at a position, and an outer peripheral ground X as a second ground region formed between the solid ground electrode Y and an end of the substrate 801. In this way, malfunctions of electronic components mounted on the substrate 801 can be reduced.

  The outer peripheral ground X and the solid ground electrode Y are electrically connected only at one connection point on the substrate 801 (for example, one terminal of the substrate-side connector KCN on the substrate 801). By doing so, the outer peripheral ground X and the solid ground electrode Y are electrically connected, so that the malfunction of the electronic component can be further reduced, and the substrate for electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the solid ground electrode Y. Wiring at 801 can also be reduced.

  The board 801 is mounted with a board-side connector KCN for electrically connecting the board 801 and another board (for example, the effect control board 12). The outer peripheral ground X and the solid ground electrode Y are Electrical connection is made in the other substrate. Thus, by electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the solid ground electrode Y, it is possible to further reduce malfunctions of electronic components, and to connect wiring on the substrate 801 for electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the solid ground electrode Y. It can be lost.

  The board 801 is mounted with a board-side connector KCN for electrically connecting the board 801 and another board (for example, the effect control board 12). The outer peripheral ground X and the solid ground electrode Y are Electrical connection is made at the board-side connector. Thus, by electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the solid ground electrode Y, it is possible to further reduce malfunctions of electronic components, and to connect wiring on the substrate 801 for electrically connecting the outer peripheral ground X and the solid ground electrode Y. It can be lost.

  Further, the front LED 810 (angle LED) is mounted inside the solid ground electrode Y, so that the malfunction of the front LED 810 (angle LED) can be further reduced.

  In addition, by providing an insulating member between the substrate 801 and the bosses 844A to 844E, malfunction of the electronic component can be further reduced.

  Further, by providing the substrate 801 and the bosses 844A to 844E separated by a specific distance, malfunction of the electronic component can be further reduced.

  In addition, in this modification 12, although an example of the noise countermeasure of the board | substrate 801 in the 1st effect body 800 was demonstrated, it is a conductive member (for example, surface) so that it may adjoin to the outer periphery of the LED board 275 of the movable body 250 of the said Example. In the case where the base body 255 or the like subjected to the plating process is disposed, the LED substrate 275 includes a first ground region formed at a position close to the electronic component to be mounted, and the first ground region and the mounting substrate. And a second ground region formed between the end portions of the first and second ends.

  In particular, the conductive member is adjacent to the outer periphery of the LED board 275 of the movable body 250 on which the connector 603 as an example of an electronic component to which wiring from a control unit such as the motor driving IC 601 and the LED driving IC 602 is connected is mounted. In the case where (for example, a base body 255 whose surface is plated) is disposed, the LED substrate 275 includes a first ground region formed at a position close to the connector 603, the first ground region, and the LED. By having the second ground region formed between the ends of the substrate 275, the control by the control means such as the motor driving IC 601 and the LED driving IC 602 connected to the connector 603 is affected by noise. Can be suppressed.

(Structure etc. of the first effect body 800)
Next, the detailed structure of the 1st effect body 800 is demonstrated based on FIGS. 27A is a front view showing the first effect body, and FIG. 27B is a rear view. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the first effect body is viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the first effect body is viewed obliquely from behind. 30 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, the first effect body 800 includes a substrate 801 having a plurality of electronic components and wiring patterns formed on the front and rear surfaces, and a translucency disposed so as to cover the front surface of the substrate 801. A front lens member 802 made of a member, a decorative member 803 made of a non-light transmissive member arranged to cover the front surface of the front lens member 802, and a light transmissive property arranged to cover the back surface of the substrate 801. A rear lens member 804 made of a member, and is formed in a strip shape along the lower left edge of the opening formed in the board as viewed from the front.

  A plurality of electronic components including a plurality of front LEDs 810 to 812 and 813 which are light emitting diodes (light emitting elements) are mounted on the front surface 801F of the substrate 801. The front LEDs 810 to 812 are angle LEDs that can irradiate light along the front surface 801F in a predetermined direction, respectively, and the front LEDs 813 are LEDs that can irradiate light forward. In addition to the light-emitting diode (light-emitting element), the front surface 801F receives a serial control signal including an operation instruction output from the effect control board 12 to control lighting / extinguishing of each LED and the like. Control means such as an LED driving IC to be performed is included.

  A plurality of electronic components including a plurality of rear LEDs 820 to 822 which are light emitting diodes (light emitting elements) are mounted on the back surface 801B of the substrate 801. The rear LEDs 820 and 821 are angle LEDs that can emit light along the back surface 801B toward the right side of the substrate 801, and the rear LEDs 822 are along the back surface 801B toward the left side of the substrate 801. It is an angle LED that can irradiate light. Also, a board-side connector KCN for connecting a plurality of electronic components including the front LEDs 810 to 812 and the rear LEDs 820 to 822 mounted on the front face 801F and the rear face 801B to the effect control board 12 is provided on the upper portion of the rear face 801B. It has been.

  Further, notches 824A to 824E for avoiding interference with bosses 844A to 844E and fitting portions 870A to 870E, which will be described later, are formed at predetermined locations on the edge of the substrate 801. Various electronic components mounted on the front surface 801F and the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 are electronic components that are mainly connected to the effect control board 12 and controlled by the effect control CPU 120.

  The front lens member 802 is formed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having a size capable of covering the front surface 801F of the substrate 801. On the front surface of the front lens member 802, a first light emitting portion 830-832 formed at a position corresponding to each of the plurality of front LEDs 810-812 and a substantially circular shape in front view formed at a position corresponding to each of the plurality of front LEDs 813 The second light emitting portion 833 is formed so as to protrude forward. In addition, these 1st light emission parts 830-832 and the 2nd light emission part 833 are protruded and formed ahead so that a recessed part may be formed in a back surface. A plurality of insertion holes 834A to 834E into which bosses 844A to 844E described later are inserted are formed in the vicinity of the edge portion.

  The decorative member 803 is formed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having a size capable of covering the front surface of the front lens member 802. Openings 840 to 843 into which the first light emitting units 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833 can be inserted are formed at positions corresponding to the first light emitting units 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833, respectively. Each of the first light emitting units 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833 can face forward through the openings 840 to 843.

  Cylindrical bosses 844A to 844E as protrusions that can be inserted through the insertion holes 834A to 834E of the front lens member 802 are formed so as to protrude rearward at a plurality of positions near the edge on the back surface of the decorative member 803. Has been.

  The decorative member 803 is formed of a non-conductive synthetic resin material. As shown in FIGS. 30 to 32 and FIG. 34, the conductive portions 850 (for example, the figure) are formed by performing plating treatment (metallized surface treatment) on the front and back surfaces of the regions except for the surfaces of the bosses 844A to 844E. 34 is formed on the surface area of the bosses 844A to 844E, and a non-conductive portion 851 not subjected to plating (metallized surface treatment) (for example, a thick line in FIG. 34). (Not shown) is formed.

  The rear lens member 804 is formed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having a size that can cover the back surface B of the substrate 801. An LED opening 860 that opens the rear LED 820 to the back side is formed at a position corresponding to the rear LED 820 in the rear lens member 804, and the rear LED 821 is placed on the back side at a position corresponding to the rear LED 821. An LED opening 861 to be opened is formed, and an LED opening 862 that opens the rear LED 822 to the back side is formed at a position corresponding to the rear LED 822.

  The opening 860A is an opening in which one LED opening 860 and the LED opening 862 are integrated. A molding opening 865 is formed on the right side of each LED opening 860.

  On the left and right sides of the rear lens member 804, a plurality of concave and convex portions are formed along each side, and the light that has been guided inside the rear lens member 804 can be diffused and emitted to the outside. Diffusion portions 867L and 867R are formed. In addition, the bosses 844A to 844E can be fitted at positions corresponding to the bosses 844A to 844E on the front surface of the rear lens member 804, and fitting portions 870A to 870A to which attachment holes 871 of the screws N1 are respectively formed. 870E is formed. A mounting portion 866 for the vibration detection sensor MG is formed below the rear lens member 804.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the first effect body 800 configured as described above has a front lens member 802 and a decorative member 803 arranged on the front side of the substrate 801, and a rear lens on the back side of the substrate 801. With the member 804 disposed, the bosses 844A to 844E of the decorative member 803 are inserted into the insertion holes 834A to 834E, and the inserted bosses 844A to 844E are respectively fitted to the fitting portions 870A to 870E of the rear lens member 804. Then, the screw N1 attached to the attachment hole 871 from the back side of the rear lens member 804 is screwed into the screw holes formed at the tips of the bosses 844A to 844E, so that the substrate 801, the front lens member 802, and the decoration are assembled. The first effect body 800 is formed by integrating the member 803 and the rear lens member 804.

  30 to 32, in the state where the substrate 801, the front lens member 802, the decorative member 803, and the rear lens member 804 are integrated, the front lens member 802 is a distance from the front surface 801F of the substrate 801. The rear lens member 804 is disposed away from the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 by a distance L2 shorter than the distance L1 (L1> L2).

  Specifically, since the front LED 813 capable of emitting forward is mounted on the front surface 801F of the substrate 801, if the front lens member 802 is too close to the front LED 813, light from the front LED 813 spreads to the surroundings. The light is emitted locally through the front lens member 802 before. In order to avoid this, it is preferable to dispose the front LED 813 and the front lens member 802 at a distance longer than at least the protruding length of the front LED 813 from the front surface 801F.

  On the other hand, an LED that can emit light rearward is not mounted on the back surface 801B of the substrate 801. Further, LED openings 860 to 862 are formed at positions corresponding to the rear LEDs 820 to 822 in the rear lens member 804, so that the rear lens member 804 interferes with the rear LEDs 820 to 822. And close to the substrate 801 side (see FIG. 31).

  In addition, the decorative member 803 is disposed on the front surface of the front lens member 802 so that the areas other than the first light emitting units 830 to 832 and the second light emitting unit 833 in the front lens member 802 are covered, so that the first light emission is performed. Only the portions 830 to 832 and the second light emitting portion 833 are conspicuous.

(Light emitting structure on the front side of the first director)
Next, the light emitting structure on the front side of the first effect body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. 30 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG.

  In addition, since the structure of each 1st light emission part 830-832 and each 2nd light emission part 833 differs only in the shape of a member, etc., and the light emission principle is substantially the same, in FIG. 30, only about the 1st light emission part 831. A description of the first light emitting units 830 and 832 will be omitted. In FIG. 31, only one second light emitting unit 833 among the plurality of second light emitting units 833 will be described, and description of the other second light emitting units 833 will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the front LED 811 is disposed slightly behind the first light emitting unit 831 on the left side. The front LED 811 emits light from the left side to the right side mainly along the front surface 801F of the substrate 801 on the back surface side of the first light emitting unit 831. However, the front LED 811 is directed toward the back surface of the first light emitting unit 831 of the front lens member 802. A part of the light is incident on the front lens member 802 because it is arranged at a distance L3, that is, close to it. The light incident on the front lens member 802 is guided while being totally reflected inside the front lens member 802, and is projected from the front surface of the first light emitting unit 831 protruding so as to face forward through the opening 841. It is emitted forward. Thereby, the first light emitting unit 831 emits light. Note that the front surface of the first light emitting portion 831 of the front lens member 802 is formed in an uneven shape, so that the light inside the front lens member 802 is emitted forward while diffusing.

  Further, the first light emitting portion 831 of the front lens member 802 is formed so as to protrude forward from the plate-like portion, and is inserted into the cylindrical opening 841 of the decorative member 803. Since the inner peripheral surface of the opening 841 is a conductive portion 850 that has been plated, the light guided from the plate-like portion to the first light emitting portion 831 side is totally reflected by the conductive portion 850. Therefore, the light inside the front lens member 802 is likely to be emitted forward.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the front LED 813 is a top-type LED that is arranged so as to be able to irradiate light from the rear position of the second light emitting unit 833 toward the front (in a direction orthogonal to the front surface 801F of the substrate 801). Since the front lens member 802 is separated from the back surface of the second light emitting unit 833 by the maximum distance L4, most of the light is incident on the back surface of the second light emitting unit 833. The light that has entered the front lens member 802 is emitted forward from the front surface of the second light emitting unit 833 that protrudes forward through the opening 843. Thereby, the second light emitting unit 833 emits light. The front surface of the second light emitting portion 833 of the front lens member 802 is formed in a dome shape, so that the light inside the front lens member 802 is emitted forward so as to spread around.

  30 and 31, when comparing the first light emitting unit 831 and the second light emitting unit 833, the distance L3 (see FIG. 30) from the front LED 811 to the back of the first light emitting unit 831 is from the front LED 813. It is shorter than the distance L4 (see FIG. 31) to the back surface of the second light emitting unit 833 (L3 <L4).

  In the first light emitting unit 831 having a short distance L3 from the light emitting body to the light emitting unit, the front LED 811 is disposed as an angle LED at a position not corresponding to the first light emitting unit 831 and is different from the first light emitting unit 831. In the second light emitting unit 833 in which the distance L4 from the light emitter to the light emitting unit is longer than the distance L3, the front LED 813 is an angle LED. Without being arranged at a position corresponding to the second light emitting unit 833, light is directly incident on the second light emitting unit 833 to cause the second light emitting unit 833 to emit light directly.

  That is, the first light emitting unit 831 emits light in a direction (front) orthogonal to the irradiation direction (left direction) of light from the front LED 811, whereas the second light emitting unit 833 includes the front LED 813. Since the light is emitted in the same direction (front) as the direction of irradiation of light from the front (front), the first light emitting unit 831 and the second light emitting unit 833 provided on the front surface of the decorative member 803 are different from each other in light emitting mode. Can emit light. Further, the first light emitting unit 831 and the second light emitting unit 833 having different projecting lengths from the front surface 801F of the substrate 801 can be provided on the front surface of the decorative member 803.

(Light-emitting structure on the back side of the first director)
Next, the light emitting structure on the back side of the first effect body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 33 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 34A is a rear view showing the light emission mode of the first effector, FIG. 34B is a front view showing the positional relationship between the first effector and the second effector, and FIG. 34C is the first effector. It is a schematic plan view which shows the positional relationship with a 2nd effect body.

  As shown in FIG. 32, each rear LED 820 is housed one by one in each LED opening 860 formed in the rear lens member 804, and from the left side to the right side along the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 toward the right side. It arrange | positions so that light may be irradiated to. In addition, an inclined surface portion 825 that is gradually inclined rearward toward the right side is formed on the LED opening 860 side on the peripheral surface of the molding opening 865.

  Therefore, the light emitted from the rear LED 820 enters the inside from the wall surface on the molding opening 865 side on the inner peripheral surface of the LED opening 860, and the light incident on the inside is directed rearward by the inclined surface portion 825. And is emitted backward from between the molding opening 865 and the LED opening 860 on the back surface of the rear lens member 804.

  As shown in FIG. 33, each rear LED 821 is housed one by one in each LED opening 861 formed in the rear lens member 804, and from the left side to the right side along the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 toward the right side. It arrange | positions so that light may be irradiated to. Therefore, the light emitted from the rear LED 821 enters the inside from the right wall surface on the inner peripheral surface of the LED opening 861, and the light incident on the inside faces the inside of the rear lens member 804 toward the right side. After being guided while being totally reflected, it is emitted from the light diffusion portion 867R.

  Further, although not particularly illustrated, each rear LED 822 is housed one by one in each LED opening 862 formed in the rear lens member 804 and left to right along the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 toward the right. It arrange | positions so that light may be irradiated to. Therefore, the light emitted from the rear LED 821 enters the inside from the left wall surface on the inner peripheral surface of the LED opening 862, and the light incident on the inside faces the inside of the rear lens member 804 toward the left side. After being guided while being totally reflected, it is emitted from the light diffusion portion 867L.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, a plurality of rear LEDs 820 are arranged in the vertical direction at a substantially central position of the left and right sides of the back surface 801B of the substrate 801, and a plurality of rear LEDs 820 are disposed near the right side of the back surface 801B. The rear LEDs 821 are arranged in the vertical direction, and a plurality of rear LEDs 822 are arranged in the vertical direction near the left side of the back surface 801B.

  When the rear LED 820 emits light, the inclined surface portion 825 between each LED opening 860 and the molding opening 865 in the rear lens member 804 emits light, and when the rear LED 821 emits light, the light diffusion portion 867R emits light. When the rear LED 822 emits light, the light diffusion portion 867L emits light. The inclined surface portion 825 and the light diffusing portions 867L and 867R can emit light toward the front and rear surfaces and the side along the substrate 801. 2 The effect body 900 can be suitably illuminated (see FIG. 34C).

  As shown in FIGS. 34B and 34C, in the present embodiment, second effect body 900 is provided on the back side of first effect body 800. Specifically, the second effect body 900 includes an origin position positioned so as to be superimposed on the back side of the first effect body 800 when viewed from the front by a drive source (not shown), an effect position diagonally right above the origin position, It is possible to move (operate) between. As shown in FIG. 34C, the second effect body 900 is arranged at a position that is a predetermined distance away from the first effect body 800 at the origin position. The director 800 can be moved in a direction along the substrate 801.

  Accordingly, when the second effect body 900 on the back side of the first effect body 800 is at the origin position, the rear LEDs 820 to 822 provided on the back surface side of the first effect body 800 are caused to emit light, thereby causing the second effect. The front side of the body 900 can be suitably illuminated. Further, even when the second effect body 900 moves to the effect position obliquely above and to the right of the origin position, the second effect body 900 can be suitably illuminated with the light from the light diffusing unit 867R.

  Further, for example, when the rear LEDs 820 to 822 are arranged so that light can be irradiated on the back side in a direction orthogonal to the back surface 801B of the substrate 801, the back lens member 804 covers the back surface 801B of the substrate 801. In this case, it is necessary to dispose the rear lens member 804 at a position farther to the rear side than the rear LEDs 820 to 822, and the front and rear dimensions of the second effect body 900 increase accordingly, as in the present embodiment. The rear LEDs 820 to 822 are arranged as angle LEDs so as to be able to irradiate in the direction along the rear surface 801B, and the light is reflected backward by the inclined surface portion 825 of the rear lens member 804 disposed close to the substrate 801. The second effect body 900 on the back side can be suitably illuminated while shortening the front-rear dimension of the second effect body 900.

(Countermeasures against board noise 2)
Next, the antistatic structure of the first effect body 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 35A is a main part front view showing a state in which the first effect body is viewed through the game board, and FIG. 35B is a diagram showing main parts of the board. FIG. 36 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. FIG. 37A is a diagram showing an antistatic structure as a thirteenth modification of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (A) and FIG. 36, a plurality of metal obstacle nails K are provided on the front surface of the board surface plate 2A constituting the game board 2. Each obstacle nail K is erected so as to protrude forward while being inclined in a predetermined direction with respect to the game board surface by being press-fitted into a through-hole 2d formed so as to penetrate the board surface plate 2A forward and backward. .

  As shown in FIG. 1, FIG. 35 (A) and FIG. 36, the first effect body 800 is located on the left side of the game area 10, specifically, on the lower left side of the opening 2 c formed on the board 2 </ b> A of the game board 2. In position, it is provided so as to be close to the back surface of the board surface plate 2A. Therefore, the static electricity generated for some reason and charged in the game ball may be discharged to the first effect body 800 on the back side of the board surface plate 2A through the through hole 2d.

  The static electricity is provided on the game board surface of the board board 2A, for example, a game ball flowing down the game area 10 is replaced by the obstacle nail K, the board surface board 2A made of acrylic resin material, and the glass window 50a. Contact with an obstacle or an accessory made of a synthetic resin material, that is, when the ball flows down in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is charged to the gaming ball, or the gaming ball is outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 It may be caused by a charged game ball entering the pachinko gaming machine 1 while circulating in a game island or the like. Furthermore, it is charged by friction generated by movement of a movable object other than the game ball such as an operable accessory such as the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, the rendering device 200, or the second rendering body 900. It is also possible.

  Here, when the plating process is performed over the entire front and back surfaces including the peripheral surfaces of the bosses 844A to 844E in the decorative member 803 of the first effect body 800, and the front and back surfaces are conductive portions, the discharged electricity is It is conceivable that the decorative member 803 goes from the front side to the back side (back side) and further goes to the peripheral surfaces of the bosses 844A to 844E.

  As shown in FIGS. 35B and 36, the bosses 844A to 844E protrude on the back side of the substrate 801 and are located on the sides of the notches 824A to 824E formed on the substrate 801. There is a possibility that electricity that wraps around from the front surface side to the back surface side of the decorative member 803 is discharged to the substrate 801 side through the bosses 844A to 844E.

  As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 36, the periphery of the bosses 844A to 844E is covered with a front lens member 802 and a rear lens member 804 that are non-conductive members. If there is even a gap (not shown) between the periphery of the insertion holes 834A to 834E and the fitting portions 870A to 870E of the rear lens member 804, electric discharge is generated from the gap to the substrate 801 side.

  And when it discharges to the board | substrate 801 side in this way, electricity flows into the wiring pattern formed in the surface 800F of the board | substrate 801, and light emission of front LED810-812,813 or this front LED810-812,813 mounted in the surface 800F A malfunction (for example, inability to emit light, abnormal color development, abnormal emission control, etc.) occurs in an electronic component such as an LED driving IC that performs control or (control means), and particularly as shown in FIG. 36, the surface 800F of the substrate 801 There is a possibility that the front LED 810 disposed near the boss 844C in the battery is directly discharged to cause a problem in the front LED 810.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, the bosses 844A to 844E protruding toward the substrate 801 are formed with non-conductive portions 851 that are not plated on the surface. The electricity that has sneak to the back side of the member 804 is less likely to be discharged to the substrate 801 side via the bosses 844A to 844E that protrude to the substrate 801 side, which may cause problems with various electronic components mounted on the surface 800F. It can suppress suitably.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention, electronic components (for example, front LEDs 810 to 812, 813, rear LEDs 820 to 822, connector KCN, conversion IC, etc.) are mounted. And a decorative member 803 disposed so as to cover the front surface 801F that is the mounting surface of the electronic component on the substrate 801. The decorative member 803 has conductive portions 850 on the front and back surfaces. The bosses 844A to 844E are formed as protrusions that protrude toward the substrate 801, and the bosses 844A to 844E have a non-conductive portion 851 on the substrate 801 side.

  By doing in this way, it can suppress that a malfunction arises in an electronic component by the discharge from the electroconductive part 850. FIG.

  Specifically, the static electricity charged on the obstacle nail K is discharged to the conductive portion 850 of the decoration member 803, so that the static electricity charged on the game ball is transferred to the conductive portion 850 of the decoration member 803 via the conductive obstacle nail K. Since it can escape, it can suppress that a game ball is charged with static electricity. Further, in the decorative member 803, the bosses 844A to 844E protrude toward the substrate 801 as compared with other portions, that is, close to the substrate 801, but the surface of the bosses 844A to 844E is subjected to plating treatment. Since the non-conductive portion 851 is formed without being applied, it is possible to suitably suppress the electricity that has entered the back side of the decorative member 803 from being discharged to the substrate 801 side through the bosses 844A to 844E.

  In addition, since the front lens member 802 made of a non-conductive member is disposed between the front surface 801F of the substrate 801 and the back surface of the decoration member 803, the electricity that wraps around to the back surface side of the decoration member 803 is boss. It is possible to suppress discharge to the front side of the substrate 801 without passing through 844A to 844E.

  Further, the bosses 844A to 844E are inserted through the insertion holes 834A to 834E of the front lens member 802 made of a non-conductive member on the tip side, and protrude toward the substrate 801 from the front lens member 802. Since the non-conductive portion 851 is formed on the surface of the distal end portion, it is possible to prevent electricity from flowing to a portion protruding to the substrate 801 side from the front lens member 802.

  The electronic component is a light emitting diode (for example, front LEDs 810 to 812, 813, etc.). By doing in this way, it can suppress that a malfunction arises in light emission. In particular, angle LEDs such as the front side LEDs 810 to 812 can irradiate light on a member close to the edge of the substrate, and thus are often arranged closer to the periphery of the substrate than the top type LED. Therefore, even in such a case, even when the front LED 810 that is an angle LED is disposed in the vicinity of the bosses 844A to 844E, static electricity can be suppressed from being discharged to the substrate 801 through the bosses 844A to 844E.

  The electronic component is a connector (for example, a board-side connector KCN). By doing in this way, it can suppress that a malfunction arises not only in the electronic component of the front surface 801F of the board | substrate 801 in which a connector is mounted, but the tip electronic component connected via the connector. In particular, the connector is often arranged near the periphery of the substrate so that the wiring connected to the connector does not follow the mounting surface. Therefore, even in such a case, even when the front LED 810 that is an angle LED is disposed in the vicinity of the bosses 844A to 844E, static electricity can be suppressed from being discharged to the substrate 801 through the bosses 844A to 844E.

  The substrate 801 is mounted with control means (for example, a conversion IC) that controls other electronic components including the electronic components. In this way, not only the electronic components mounted on the substrate 801 but also other electronic components such as, for example, a problem occurs in the control of other electronic components mounted on another substrate connected to the substrate 801. It is possible to suppress adverse effects on parts.

  Further, a front lens member 802 as a non-conductive member is provided between the decorative member 803 and the substrate 801, and the front lens member 802 can guide light from the front LEDs 810 to 812 and 813 provided on the substrate 801. It is a light guide member (translucent member).

  By doing in this way, the discharge from the decoration member 803 to the board | substrate 801 can be suppressed using the front side lens member 802 which is a light guide member which can guide | emit the light from front side LED810-812,813.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the front side LEDs 810-812, 813, the rear side LEDs 820-822, the board | substrate side connector KCN, conversion IC, etc. were illustrated as an example of an electronic component, this invention is limited to this. However, it includes various other electronic components such as detection means such as sensors, drive sources such as motors and solenoids, storage means such as ROM and RAM, protective resistors, diodes, and capacitors.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although electronic components, such as front LED810-812,813, rear LED820-822, board | substrate side connector KCN, were connected to the production control board 12, this invention is shown to this. It is not limited, It may be connected to boards (for example, main board 11 etc.) other than presentation control board 12, and control means (for example, CPU103 etc.).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the form in which the electroconductive part 850 was formed by plating the surface (front-and-rear surface) of the decoration member 803 was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, For example, the conductive member may be formed on the surface by forming the decorative member 803 with a synthetic resin material having conductivity by mixing carbon fiber or the like.

  In the above-described embodiment, the bosses 844A to 844E into which the screw N1 for integrating the decorative member 803 and the rear lens member 804 covering the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 are screwed are applied as the protrusions. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the members are integrated as described above as long as the portion protrudes from the decorative member 803 toward the substrate 801 than the other portions. A protrusion other than the boss into which the screw is screwed (for example, a positioning boss for determining the mounting position of the substrate 801 or another member with respect to the decorative member 803) may be applied.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the boss | hub 844A-844E as a protrusion part illustrated the form which has the protrusion length which passes the side of the board | substrate 801 and reaches the back surface 801B side, this invention is limited to this. The protrusion may be any protrusion that protrudes closer to the substrate 801 than the other part of the decorative member. For example, the protrusion is formed from the position corresponding to the front surface 801F of the decorative member 803. You may protrude so that it may adjoin or contact | abut to 801F.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the form in which the nonelectroconductive part 851 was formed in the surface of the boss | hub 844A-844E as a protrusion part was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, The surface of a protrusion part As long as the non-conductive portion 851 is formed in at least a portion corresponding to the substrate 801, the conductive portion 850 may be formed in other regions.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the decoration member 803 illustrated the form arrange | positioned close to the back side of the board 2A of the game board 2, this invention is not limited to this, A decoration member May be arranged at a position other than the above.

  In the above embodiment, the decorative member 803 is exemplified to be disposed so as to cover the front surface 801F of the substrate 801. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member 803 is not limited to the substrate 801. It may be arranged so as to cover the back surface 801B.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention, a first effect body 800 having a substrate 801 provided with a light emitter (for example, rear LEDs 820 to 822) on the back surface 801B, and a substrate 801 The second effector 900 operable on the back surface 801B side of the second effector 900 can be irradiated with the light from the rear LEDs 820 to 822.

  By doing so, there is no need to mount the substrate 801 on which the rear LEDs 820 to 822 are mounted on the operable second effect body 900. It becomes possible to produce.

  In addition, the second effect body 900 is movable in a direction (for example, the left-right direction) along the back surface 801B of the substrate 801, and the rear LEDs 820 to 822 emit light toward the moving direction of the second effect body 900. Is possible. Specifically, when the rear LED 821 emits light, the light diffusion portion 867R emits light, and when the rear LED 822 emits light, the light diffusion portion 867L emits light. The inclined surface portion 825 and the light diffusing portions 867L and 867R can emit light sideways along the back surface and the substrate 801. Therefore, the inclined surface portion 825 and the light diffusing portions 867L and 867R move from the back surface side and the origin position to the production position side diagonally right above The second effect body 900 can be illuminated appropriately.

  By doing in this way, even when the 2nd production body 900 moves to the side of the 1st production body 800, light can be irradiated suitably.

  In the present embodiment, the right light diffusing unit 867R emits light by the rear LED 821, so that the second effect body 900 that has moved from the origin position to the effect position diagonally right above can be suitably illuminated. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and although not particularly illustrated, the light from the rear LED 821 is moved to the right-side effect position without guiding the rear lens member 804. The directing body 900 may be directly illuminated.

  Further, a rear lens member 804 is provided as a light guide member that can cover at least a part of the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 and has LED openings 860 to 862 that can accommodate the rear LEDs 820 to 822 in the covered state. The rear LEDs 820 to 822 can enter light into the rear lens member 804 from the side surfaces (peripheral walls) of the LED openings 860 to 862 in a state of being accommodated in the LED openings 860 to 862 (FIG. 32). reference).

  In this way, the rear lens member 804 that guides light from the rear LEDs 820 to 822 can be used to cover the substrate 801, and the rear lens member 804 is disposed close to the substrate 801. Therefore, the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the first effect body 800 can be reduced.

  Therefore, for example, when the rear side second effect body 900 can be illuminated by the rear LEDs 820 to 822 of the first effect body 800, the front-rear dimension between the game board 2 and the effect display device 5 is set. Even when there is a restriction, the first effect body 800 and the second effect body 900 are moved back and forth between the game board 2 and the effect display device 5 by reducing the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the first effect body 800 as much as possible. Can be arranged to overlap.

  In the present embodiment, the LED openings 860 to 862 are formed at positions corresponding to the rear LEDs 820 to 822 in the rear lens member 804, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the rear lens member 804 is made close to the substrate 801 by forming a recess capable of accommodating the rear LEDs 820 to 822 at positions corresponding to the rear LEDs 820 to 822 in the rear lens member 804. Also good.

  In addition, the rear lens member 804 has an inclined surface portion 825 as a reflection portion that reflects incident light toward the second effect body 900 at a position near the LED openings 860 to 862.

  In this way, light emitted from the rear LEDs 820 to 822 in the direction along the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 can be reflected to the back surface side, so that the protruding dimension of the substrate 801 from the back surface 801B is a normal LED. The second effect body 900 on the back side can be suitably illuminated while reducing the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the first effect body 800 using a smaller angle LED.

  Further, the rear lens member 804 includes light diffusion portions 867L and 867R as light emitting portions that emit light by light from the rear LEDs 820 to 822 that are incident on the inside from the LED openings 860 to 862.

  By doing in this way, since the light irradiated from rear side LED820-822 can be made to circulate around and it can be made to light, a production effect can be heightened.

  In addition, front LEDs 810 to 812 and 813 different from the rear LEDs 820 to 822 are provided on the front surface 801F opposite to the back surface 801B of the substrate 801.

  By doing in this way, the front side of the 1st production body 800 can also be made to shine suitably.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the 2nd effect body 900 is arrange | positioned so that operation | movement is possible on the back side of the 1st effect body 800, and the 2nd effect body 900 on the back side is arranged by rear LED820-822 of the 1st effect body 800. Although the form which illuminates suitably was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, The 2nd effect body 900 is arrange | positioned at the front side of the 1st effect body 800 so that operation | movement is possible, and front LED810 of the 1st effect body 800 You may enable it to illuminate suitably the 2nd effect body 900 of the front side by ~ 812,813.

  In the embodiment, the second effect body 900 is movable in the direction along the substrate 801 between the origin position on the back side of the first effect body 800 and the effect position diagonally right above the origin position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode of operation of the second rendering body 900 is arbitrary, not only being movable in the left-right direction, but also in the front-rear direction, the up-down direction. It may be movable.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the form which illuminates the 2nd effect body 900 by reflecting the light from back LED820-822 of the 1st effect body 800 in the back by the inclined surface part 825 of the rear lens member 804 is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rear LEDs 820 to 822 of the first effect body 800 may not be angle LEDs, but may be light emitters that can emit light toward the back side.

  In the above embodiment, the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 is exemplified by the back lens member 804. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the back surface 801B of the substrate 801 is the back lens. The member 804 may not be covered. Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the 1st effect body 800 illustrated the form fixed to the predetermined position of the back side of the game board 2, this invention is not limited to this, 1st effect Body 800 may be operably provided.

  Also, a first effect body 800 having a substrate 801 provided with a light emitter (for example, rear LEDs 820 to 822) on the back surface 801B, and a second effect body 900 operable on the back surface 801B side of the substrate 801. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can irradiate the second effect body 900 with light from the rear LEDs 820 to 822, for example, the surface on the first effect body 800 side is subjected to metallized surface treatment such as plating or metal deposition. The second effect body 900 is provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the substrate 801 side of the first effect body 800 so that the projecting portion passes near the periphery of the substrate 801 in accordance with the operation of the second effect body 900. In this case, it is preferable to form a non-conductive portion on the surface of the protruding portion. By doing in this way, the electric component (for example, back 801B etc.) mounted in the back surface 801B side of the board | substrate 801 of the 1st effect body 800 arises by the discharge from the protrusion part of the 2nd effect body 900. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the substrate 801, a first ground region formed at a position close to an electronic component to be mounted (for example, the back surface 801B), and a first ground region formed between the first ground region and the peripheral portion of the substrate 801. You may make it have 2 ground area | regions. By doing in this way, when the protrusion part of the 2nd effect body 900 approaches the periphery of the board | substrate 801 of the 1st effect body 800 according to operation | movement, the static electricity which is charged to the protrusion part of the 2nd effect body 900 Even when electric discharge is generated on the substrate 801 of the first effect body 800, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems in the electronic components (for example, the back surface 801B) mounted on the back surface 801B side of the substrate 801 of the first effect body 800.

(Modification 13)
Next, Modification 13 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 37A is a diagram showing a wiring connection state between the LED board and the effect control board, and FIG. 37B is a diagram showing a wiring connection state between the LED board and the effect control board as the modification 13 of the present invention. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (A), for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modified example 13 includes an LED substrate 910 on which LEDs 911 are mounted on one side as a light-emitting body for holding display or decoration. The LED board 910 and the effect control board 12 are connected to each other via a wiring 912. As shown in FIG. 37B, the LED substrate 910 and a part of the wiring 912 extending from the back side of the LED substrate 910 are covered with a decorative member 913 that opens on the back side. On the surface of the decorative member 913, a conductive portion 914 is formed by plating.

  When the periphery of part of the wiring 912 is thus covered with the decorative member 913 having the conductive portion 914 provided on the surface, as described above, static electricity charged in the conductive portion 914 is generated in the LED substrate 910. Since the mounting surface 910F of the LED 911 and the LED 911 may be discharged, the front side of the LED substrate 910 is covered with a lens member 915 made of a non-conductive member.

  In addition, since part of the wiring 912 extending from the back side of the LED substrate 910 is covered with the conductive portion 914, static electricity charged in the conductive portion 914 is discharged to the wiring 912, thereby producing an effect control board. Since the LED drive control signal output from 12 is easily affected by noise, the position corresponding to the conductive portion 914 in the wiring 912 is placed on an electrically insulating material such as a tube made of a rubber material made of a non-conductive stop member. By covering with 916, a non-conductive member is disposed between the wiring 912 and the conductive portion 914, so that the LED drive control signal output from the effect control board 12 is less affected by noise. it can.

(Movable body initialization process)
Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. First, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process shown in FIG. 38 when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, a first initialization process (S50) for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initial setting of a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms), and the like. Then, a second initialization process is performed for returning the movable bodies 250 and 900 to the origin positions and confirming the operation (S51). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag by the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on) in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53) and executes the following process.

  The effect control CPU 120 first performs command analysis processing (S54). In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 3) is the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. And the process etc. which set the flag according to the received production control command are performed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (S55). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 5 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number update process for updating the counter value for generating effect random numbers such as jackpot symbol determination random numbers is executed (S56), and then the process proceeds to S52.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the second initialization process (S51) of the present embodiment. In the second initialization process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies a movable body to be operated first based on the setting data (S101). The setting data includes the order data of the movable bodies. In this embodiment, the order of the movable body 250 → the second rendering body 900 → the third movable body (not shown) is preset as the order. Yes. Therefore, when S101 is first executed, the movable body 250 is specified as the target movable body.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the movable body specified in S101 is an origin detection target accessory that needs to be detected (S102).

  In the present embodiment, the origin detection target object that needs to perform origin detection corresponds to the movable body 250 having the origin detection sensor and the second effect body 900 having the origin detection sensor. The 3rd movable body (not shown) which does not have is not applicable. Therefore, when the movable body specified in S101 is the movable body 250 or the second effect body 900, the determination is “Y”, while the movable body specified in S101 is the third movable body (not shown). ), It is determined as “N”.

  When it is determined “N” in S102, the process proceeds to S130. On the other hand, if “Y” is determined in S102, the process proceeds to S103, where the detection state of the origin detection sensor corresponding to the operation subject is specified (S103), and whether the origin detection sensor is in the detection state or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the target movable body is located at the origin position (initial position) (S104).

  If it is not at the origin position (initial position) (S104; N), the process proceeds to S105, and after setting the non-detection operation count counter to 0 to count the number of executions of non-detection operation control (S105) As the control speed for operating the object to be operated, the operation object is the same operation speed as the minimum speed (see FIGS. 41 and 42) in the action control for actual operation (long initialization operation control) described later. A minimum control speed for operating the accessory is set (S106), and if the driving motor of the operating subject is, for example, the operating subject is the movable body 250, the driving motor starts to be driven in the direction of the origin position. (S107) The timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is started (S108). The non-detection operation period timer may be counted by, for example, counting the number of signals output at regular intervals from the CTC initialized by the first initialization process. .

  Then, a transition is made to a monitoring state in which the origin detection sensor enters a detection state and monitors whether or not the non-detection operation period timer has reached a value corresponding to the upper limit time (S109, S110).

  When the drive device (for example, drive motor) of the operation target object is driven in the direction of the origin position, the operation object combination is located at the origin position (initial position) and the origin detection sensor enters the detection state. The driving of the movable body drive motor is stopped and the process proceeds to S130. On the other hand, when the non-detection operation period timer becomes a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, when the operation target accessory is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S112. Then, 1 is added to the non-detection operation number counter (S112), and it is determined whether or not the value of the non-detection operation number counter after the addition has reached the operation error determination number (for example, 3). (S113).

  If the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the number of operation error determinations in S113, the driving of the movable body drive motor is stopped, the origin return error of the operation subject is stored (S114), and S130. Proceed to That is, in the non-detection operation control, when the operation target combination is not located at the origin position (initial position), the operation control for actual operation confirmation to be described later is not executed for the operation target combination ( The return to origin error is stored in order to set the action subject to a dead end state, and the process proceeds to S130.

  In this embodiment, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S113, the operation target accessory is illustrated as being in a dead end state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S113, error processing is started and the second initialization is performed by executing the error processing. When the process is interrupted, the effect control main process may be interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 12 (such as the effect control CPU 120) may not be activated (dead end state).

  In addition, when the acting object is set to the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 is an input signal indicating that the movable body is operated (for example, It is preferable to execute a process of invalidating the reception of the detection signal of the effect button or the like, or preventing the movable body from operating even when the input signal is input.

  On the other hand, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter does not reach the number of operation error determinations, the driving of the movable body drive motor is stopped, the process returns to S106, and the process of S106 to S108 is performed again. The operation (moving control at the time of non-detection) of moving the target accessory to the origin position at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) is started, and the monitoring state of S109 and S110 described above is entered. Transition.

  Therefore, even if it is determined in S110 that the error determination time has elapsed, an operation (non-detection operation control) of repeatedly moving the object to be operated to the origin position (initial position) is executed until the operation error determination count is reached. If the action subject is detected at the origin position (initial position) during the operation, the process proceeds to S130 without proceeding to S114.

  On the other hand, if “Y” is determined in S104 and the process proceeds to S120, 0 is set in the operation count counter at detection, and then the operation process data at detection is set (S121a). The timer count is started (S121b). As the timer count of the detection process timer, the signal output at regular intervals from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process is the same as the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above. This may be done by counting the number or the like. In addition, in the operation process data at the time of detection according to the present embodiment, the minimum speed (FIG. 41, FIG. 41) is set as the control speed for operating the action target object. The minimum control speed for operating the object to be operated at the same operation speed as that in FIG. 42 is described (set).

  Next, the operating object is operated based on the minimum control speed set in the set detection-time operation process data (S122), and it is determined whether or not the process data is completed (S123). If the operation is not completed, the process returns to S122, and the operation subject is operated based on the minimum control speed set in the operation process data at the time of detection.

  In this way, in the detection operation control, until the detection operation process data is completed, the minimum speed based on the minimum control speed set in the detection operation process data, that is, the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initial At the lowest speed in the control operation), an operation of once leaving the origin position (initial position) and returning from the position away from the origin position (initial position) to the origin position (initial position) is performed (see FIG. 41). The position away from the origin position is a position in the vicinity of the origin position, that is, a position where the detected part of each movable body cannot be detected by each origin sensor, and is a predetermined position (detection) closer to the origin position than each effect position. Hour operating position).

  When it is determined in S123 that the set operation process data at the time of detection is completed, the driving of the movable body drive motor is stopped and the process proceeds to S124, and whether or not the origin detection sensor is in a detection state. That is, it is determined (confirmed) whether or not the action subject is located at the origin position (initial position).

  If the origin detection sensor is in a detection state, that is, if the operation subject is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S130.

  On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the operation subject is not located at the origin position (initial position), 1 is added to the detection operation number counter (S126). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the detection-time operation number counter after the addition has reached the operation error determination number (for example, 3) (S127). When the value of the operation count counter at the time of detection reaches the number of operation error determinations, the process proceeds to S128 to store the origin return error of the action target object (S128), and proceeds to S130. In other words, when the operation target object is not located at the origin position (initial position) in the operation control at the time of detection, the operation control for actual operation confirmation to be described later is not executed for the operation object combination (the operation concerned) The origin return error is stored in order to set the target accessory to the dead end state, and the process proceeds to S130.

  In the present embodiment, when the value of the detection operation number counter reaches the number of operation error determinations in S127, an example is given in which the target object to be operated is in a dead end state. However, when the value of the detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S113, error processing is started and the error processing is executed, whereby the second initialization process is performed. By being interrupted, the effect control main process may be interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 12 may be in a state where it does not start (dead end state).

  In addition, when the acting object is in the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 is an input signal (for example, an effect button) that operates the movable body. It is preferable to execute a process of invalidating the reception of the detection signal (or the like) or preventing the movable body from operating even when the input signal is input.

  In S130, which is executed when “N” is determined in S102, “Y” is determined in S109, or “Y” is determined in S124, the movable body is not yet an operation target. It is determined whether or not the remaining movable body is present, and when there is no remaining movable body (specifically, when the operation subject is a third movable body (not shown)), FIG. It shifts to the process which performs the operation control for actual operation confirmation shown in FIG. On the other hand, if there are remaining movable bodies, the process proceeds to S131, the movable body to be operated next is specified, then the process returns to S102, and the above-described processing after S102 is performed for the specified operation target combination. Do the same.

  Note that when S131 is executed when the action subject is the movable body 250, the second effect body 900 is specified as the action subject accessory based on the setting data, and the action target accessory is the second effect. When S131 is executed in the case of the body 900, the third movable body (not shown) is specified as the action target object based on the setting data.

  Next, the processing shown in FIG. 40 will be described. First, in S200 shown in FIG. 40, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a movable body (confirmation object) based on the setting data, as in S101 described above. Is identified (S200). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a storage of the origin return error of the target accessory (S201).

  If there is a storage of the origin return error of the confirmation target object, the process proceeds to S220 without executing the processes from S202a to S213. By doing so, in this embodiment, the operation control for actual operation confirmation is not performed for the movable body that is determined to have the origin return error in the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control. .

  On the other hand, if there is no storage of the return-to-origin error of the confirmation target accessory, the process proceeds to S202a to set actual operation confirmation process data corresponding to the confirmation target accessory. That is, if the object to be confirmed is the movable body 250, the process data for confirming the actual operation of the movable body 250 is set. If the object to be confirmed is the second effect body 900, the actual operation of the second effect body 900 is set. Process data for confirmation is set, and if the object to be confirmed is a third movable body (not shown), process data for actual operation confirmation of the third movable body (not shown) is set. In each actual operation check process data, the control speed and the like are described (set) so that the movable body performs the same operation as the operation actually performed in the movable body presentation in the production.

  Next, the timer count of the process timer for actual operation confirmation is started (S202b). Note that the timer count of the process timer for actual operation confirmation is a signal output at regular intervals from the CTC initialized in the first initialization process, like the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer described above. This may be done by counting the number of

  Then, in the set process data for actual operation confirmation, the object to be confirmed is operated at the control speed set corresponding to the timer count value of the process timer for actual operation confirmation (S203), and the process data is completed. In step S204, if the process data is not completed, the process returns to step S203, and the object to be confirmed is set corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer. Operate based on the controlled speed.

  As described above, until the actual operation check process data is completed, the object to be checked is operated at the control speed set in the actual operation check process data corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer. By doing so, it is possible to sequentially change the control speed of the object to be confirmed in time series, and perform the same acceleration or deceleration as the control speed set when actually operating the movable body in the movable body effect. it can.

  If it is determined in S204 that the set process data for actual operation confirmation has been completed, the driving of the movable body drive motor is stopped, and whether or not the target combination is an origin target combination. Is determined (S204a). If the target combination is not the origin detection target combination, that is, if it is the third movable body (not shown), the process proceeds to S220. If the target combination is the third movable body (not shown), the process proceeds to S222. move on. On the other hand, if the target combination is an origin detection target combination, that is, if it is the movable body 250 or the second effect body 900, whether or not the origin detection sensor is in a detection state, that is, the operation target combination is It is determined (confirmed) whether or not it is located at the origin position (initial position) (S205).

  If the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, that is, if the object to be confirmed is located at the origin position (initial position), the process proceeds to S220. On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state, that is, when the object to be confirmed is not located at the origin position (initial position), the non-detection operation control described above is performed (see FIG. 39). Steps S206 to S213 are performed in order to place the target combination at the origin position (initial position).

  Specifically, after setting 0 to the non-detection operation frequency counter for counting the number of executions of non-detection operation control (S206), the actual operation check operation control (long initialization operation control) is set as the control speed. Is set to the minimum control speed for operating the object to be operated at the same operation speed as the minimum speed (S207), and if the object to be confirmed is a movable object 250, for example, the confirmation object is driven. The motor starts to be driven in the direction of the origin position (initial position) (S208), and the timer count of the non-detection operation period timer is started (S209).

  Then, a transition is made to a monitoring state for monitoring whether the origin detection sensor is in a detection state and whether the non-detection operation period timer has a value corresponding to the upper limit time (S210, S211).

  When the target accessory is positioned at the origin position (initial position) by driving the target accessory drive device (for example, drive motor) in the direction of the origin position (initial position), and the origin detection sensor enters the detection state. Is determined as “Y” in S210 and proceeds to S220. On the other hand, if the non-detection operation period timer has a value corresponding to the upper limit time, that is, if the object to be confirmed is not located at the origin position (initial position) even after the upper limit time has elapsed, S212. Then, 1 is added to the non-detection operation number counter (S212), and it is determined whether or not the value of the non-detection operation number counter after the addition has reached the operation error determination number (for example, 3). (S213).

  If the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number, the process proceeds to S220. In this embodiment, when the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the number of operation error determinations in S213, an example is given in which the action target object is in a dead end state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the value of the non-detection operation number counter reaches the operation error determination number in S213, the origin return error of the operation target object is stored, and the operation target object is stored. Thereafter, the actual operation may not be executed. Alternatively, by starting the error process and executing the error process, the second initialization process is interrupted, whereby the effect control main process is interrupted without proceeding to S52, and the effect control board 12 is not activated. (Dead end state) may be used.

  In addition, when the acting object is in the dead end state, the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120 or the like) is activated, but for example, the effect control CPU 120 is an input signal (for example, an effect button) that operates the movable body. It is preferable to execute a process of invalidating the reception of the detection signal (or the like) or preventing the movable body from operating even when the input signal is input.

  On the other hand, if the value of the non-detection operation count counter has not reached the operation error determination count, the process returns to S207, and the processing of S207, S208, and S209 is performed again, so that the object to be confirmed is confirmed as the actual operation. The operation to move to the origin position (initial position) at the lowest speed in the operation control (long initialization operation control) (the operation at the time of returning to the origin) is started, and the process proceeds to the monitoring state of S210 and S211 described above.

  Therefore, even if it is determined in S211 that the error determination time has elapsed, an operation (non-detection operation control) is performed to repeatedly move the target object to the origin position (initial position) until the operation error determination count is reached. If the target combination is detected at the origin position (initial position) during this time, the process proceeds to S220.

  In S220 executed when “Y” is determined in S201, “N” is determined in S204a, “Y” is determined in S205, or “Y” is determined in S210. , It is determined whether or not there are any remaining movable bodies that have not yet been confirmed for operation confirmation, and if there are no remaining movable bodies (specifically, In the case of three movable bodies (not shown), the error record stored in S114 and S128 is cleared (S222), and the process ends. On the other hand, if there are remaining movable bodies, S221 Then, after specifying the movable body whose operation is to be checked next, the process returns to S201, and the above-described processing from S201 onward is similarly executed for the specified target object.

  Here, the operation mode and control contents of the movable body by executing the second initialization process shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. 41 is a schematic explanatory diagram illustrating operation modes of non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. 42A is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, FIG. 42B is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the detection-time operation control, and FIG. 42C is the control speed in the non-detection-time operation control. It is explanatory drawing which shows.

  41 and 42, the non-detection operation control (short initialization operation control) and the detection operation control (short initialization operation control) in the movable body 250 and the second effect body 900 which are the origin detection target objects. ) And actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) will be described, and description of the third movable body (not shown) that is not the origin detection target character will be omitted. In addition, the reciprocating operation distance (rotation range) of the first movable unit 302 of the movable body 250 and the reciprocating operation distances (movement range) of the second movable units 401 and 402 of the second effect body 900 are not the same. For convenience of explanation, description will be made using the same conceptual diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the first movable portion 302 of the movable body 250 and the second movable portions 401 and 402 of the second effect body 900 reciprocate between the origin position (retracted position, initial position) and the effect position, respectively. The forward movement from the origin position to the production position and the backward movement from the production position to the origin position are actual operations that are actually performed in the above-described movable body production or the like.

  When the second initialization process is executed, the production control CPU 120 detects that the detected part of the movable body is not detected by the origin detection sensor, that is, the movable body has an origin for some reason (for example, when transported or installed on a game island) If the actuator has moved from its position, or if it cannot return to its original position during the previous operation (for example, when performing a production, the return to origin of the movable body could not be confirmed or operated due to motor step-out, failure, or catching) Corresponding to the non-detection operation control in FIG. 41 (for example, when an object error (operation abnormality) such as disappearing occurs) or when moving from the origin position due to vibration of the gaming machine) If it is at a predetermined position between the origin position and the production position (such as the position indicated by a black circle), the non-detection operation control for returning to the origin is executed.When the non-detection operation control is executed, the movable body is at a position away from the origin position, and therefore, the operation is only an operation of moving the movable body in the direction of the origin position.

  In addition, when the second initialization process is executed, the production control CPU 120 uses the origin detection sensor to detect the first movable part 302 of the movable body 250 and the detected parts of the second movable parts 401 and 402 of the second presentation body 900. When it is detected, the operation control at the time of detection is executed.

  For example, in order to ensure that the detected part is detected by the origin detection sensor, a predetermined period between the time when the detected part is detected by the origin detection sensor and the operation of the movable body in the direction of the origin position is restricted. When an operable range (for example, play) is set, the origin may return and stop at a position shifted further to the back than the position detected by the origin detection sensor. Therefore, even when the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, the operation control during detection for returning the movable body to the more accurate origin position is performed.

  In this detection operation control, it is necessary to move the movable body to a position away from the origin position and then return it to the origin position in order to temporarily cancel the detection state of the detected part by the origin detection sensor. Since there is no need to move the movable body, the movable body is moved from the origin position to the detection-time operation position in the vicinity of the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. That is, the reciprocating operation is performed at a shorter distance than the actual operation (see FIGS. 18A and 18B).

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control in the second initialization process, and then executes the actual operation confirmation operation control. The operation control for actual operation confirmation is the same operation as the actual operation that the movable body actually performs in various effects.

  Next, the control speeds set when the performance control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control are compared. Note that the speeds shown in FIGS. 42A, 42B, and 42C are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 120 to operate each movable body. The operating speed is different. That is, for example, when operating a predetermined movable body, even when the same control speed is set for one movement section and another movement section between the origin position and the effect position, one movement section and another movement section When the movement section is different (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when moving up and down in the same moving section, the movable body is actually operated. In some cases, the operating speed may be different from the control speed. In addition, even if the same control speed is set for the movable body, the actual operation speed of each movable body is not necessarily the same if there is a difference in the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each movable body. It will not be the same. When operating multiple movable bodies with stepping motors of the same performance, the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each movable body, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body When there is a difference, the actual operation speed of each movable body is not necessarily the same.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (A), when executing the actual operation check operation control, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer in the set actual operation check process data. The object to be confirmed is operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed such that after acceleration from the origin position, the vehicle is decelerated and stopped at the effect position, and after acceleration from the effect position is decelerated and stopped at the origin position. That is, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation for confirming that each movable body can operate normally, the control speed of the movable body is changed in the order of low speed → high speed → low speed between the origin position and the production position. Let In other words, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body effect of each movable body, the range between the minimum speed (low speed) as the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed faster than the minimum speed. In order to control each movable body to operate at the internal speed, even when the operation control for actual operation confirmation is executed, the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the second speed that is faster than the minimum speed are used. Control is performed so that each movable body operates at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed).

  That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are actual operating speeds of the movable body, and the control speed is set to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speed. Will be. In the following description, it is assumed that when the movable body is operated based on the minimum control speed, it operates at the minimum speed, and when the movable body is operated based on the maximum control speed, it operates at the maximum speed. To do.

  Here, the control speed is set so that the operation speed at the time of acceleration and deceleration of the movable body becomes the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving to the production position, the movable body can be surely secured by controlling so that it becomes the minimum speed in the action control for actual operation confirmation over a longer time than when stopping at the production position. The detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor after the vehicle is decelerated.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (B), when executing the motion control at the time of detection, the CPU 120 for effect control always confirms the actual operation in the period for moving from the origin position to the effect position and the period for moving from the effect position to the origin position. The movable body is controlled to operate at the minimum speed (first speed) in the operation control. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed in the detection-time operation control as the first operation control that is equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (in this embodiment, the actual operation The control is performed such that the movable body is operated based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation confirmation operation control so that the speed is always the same as the minimum speed in the confirmation operation control.

  In the case of motion control during detection, the moving distance of the movable body is shorter than that for motion control for actual motion check. Check the actual operation because the sensor may not be able to detect the detected part reliably, or the movable body may be damaged due to impact when the movable body returns to the home position from a short distance and the movement is restricted. Control to operate at the lowest speed in operation control.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (C), when performing the non-detection operation control, the effect control CPU 120 always moves from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. Control is performed so as to operate at the minimum speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control that is equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this implementation). In this mode, the movable body is always operated based on the lowest control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation check operation control so that the same speed as the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control is obtained. To control.

  In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable body is from the origin position, if the movable body is located near the origin position, the control speed when accelerating in the operation control for actual operation confirmation In other words, when operated at high speed, when the movable body returns to the origin position, the origin detection sensor cannot reliably detect the detected part, or the movable body returns to the origin position from a short distance and the movement is restricted. Since there is a possibility that the movable body or the like may be damaged due to an impact, control is performed so as to operate at the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation control, the minimum control speed set in the actual operation check operation control. Based on the above, control is performed so that the movable body always operates at a single (constant) operation speed. These minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the action control for actual operation confirmation corresponding to each movable body, and are not the operation speeds common to each movable body, and therefore the minimum speeds in each movable body may be different.

  Specifically, since the movable body 250 and the second rendering body 900 are different in size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, and drive mechanism including the drive motor, the movable body even when the same control speed is set. The actual operating speed is different. Even when different control speeds are set for the respective movable bodies, the actual operation speed of the movable bodies is different. Thus, the minimum speed is an operation speed based on the control speed set according to each movable body, and a plurality of movable bodies having different modes are controlled in order to perform control so that the movable body operates at the minimum speed. It is possible to reliably detect at the origin position.

(Modification 14)
Next, although not shown in particular, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a shielding member 57L that can shield the left side of the front side of the effect display device 5 from being unrecognizable from the player, and the right side of the front side of the effect display device 5. The shielding member 57R that can be shielded from being visible to the player, the shielding members 57L and 57R, the non-shielding position where the front side of the effect display device 5 is visible from the player, and the effect display device 5 , A left side LED 57b composed mainly of a plurality of LEDs arranged mainly on the shielding member 57L, A right LED 57c configured by a plurality of LEDs arranged on the shielding member 57R, a circuit for driving and controlling the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left LED 57b, and the right LED 57c are provided. The circuit configuration of the blocking unit control board 57d in the case of providing the shielding unit 57 formed by the shield unit control board 57d such that is will be described with reference to FIG. 43.

  A shielding unit control board 57d is connected to the effect control board 12, and a shielding member operation motor 57a, a left LED 57b, and a right LED 57c are connected to the shielding unit control board 57d. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits a control signal for controlling the excitation mode of the shielding member operation motor 57a and the lighting mode of the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c to the shielding unit control board 57d. Thus, the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left LED 57b, and the right LED 57c can be operated in a predetermined manner according to the control signal via the shielding unit control board 57d.

  The control signal transmitted to the shielding unit control board 57d by the effect control CPU 120 includes a serial control signal 1 for controlling the lighting mode of the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c (for example, the LED driving serial signal ( (Corresponding to ASIBADT), serial control signal 2 for controlling the excitation mode of the shielding member operating motor 57a (for example, corresponding to the motor drive serial signal (S1TXD) etc. in the above embodiment), serial control signal 1 A clock signal 1 (for example, corresponding to the LED driving serial signal (ASIBACLK) in the above embodiment), a clock signal 2 for transmitting the serial control signal 2 (for example, motor driving in the above embodiment) Production serial control (corresponding to the serial signal (S1SCK), etc.) Signal lines for transmitting the signals from the plate 12 is connected to the blocking unit control board 57d via the connector. The serial control signal and the clock signal are transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the shielding unit control board 57d by a voltage supplied on the effect control board 12 side, and will be shielded as will be described later. Regardless of whether the power supply VCC is connected to the unit control board 57d, a voltage corresponding to the output state of the signal from the effect control board 12 is supplied to the signal line of the serial control signal and the signal line of the clock signal. Will be.

  In addition, power is supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d from the power supply board through a plurality of power supply lines, and each circuit and the like mounted on the shielding unit control board 57d is connected to the power supply line. A power supply line (12V) used to operate a power supply line (hereinafter also referred to as a power supply line VCC) for supplying a power supply VCC (5V), a shielding member operation motor 57a, a left LED 57b, a right LED 57c, etc. Power supply line (hereinafter also referred to as power supply line VDL), power supply line of power supply VSL used for other circuits and electronic components (not shown) (hereinafter also referred to as power supply line VSL). Are included, and a power supply line for supplying each power supply is connected to the shielding unit control board 57d via a connector.

  Further, among the power supply lines that supply power to the shielding unit control board 57d, the power supply line VCC is branched into two power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2 before being connected to the shielding unit control board 57d, and is connected to the shielding unit control board 57d. It has come to be.

  In the present modification, the description of grounding (ground) is omitted in the block diagram and the like of the shielding unit control board 57d, but grounding is appropriately performed.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the shielding unit control board 57d is equipped with a connector 57e to which a signal line of a control signal transmitted from the CPU 120 for effect control and a power supply line of a power source are connected. The connector 57e includes a plurality of terminals, and a signal line for the serial control signal 1, a signal line for the serial control signal 2, a signal line for the clock signal 1, and a signal line for the clock signal 2 are connected to the terminal group on one end side. The power supply line VCC1, the power supply line VCC2, the power supply line VDL, and the power supply line VSL are connected to the terminal group on the other end side.

  In addition, each terminal of the terminal group to which the power line in the connector 57e is connected is connected to each power line in the order of the power lines VCC1, VSL, VDL, and VCC2, in order from the terminal on the signal line side of the connector 57e. The power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2 are connected to both ends of the terminal group of the power supply lines. That is, the power supply line VCC1 is connected to a terminal on one end side of the terminal group of the power supply line of the connector 57e, while the power supply line VCC2 is connected to the power supply line VCC2 of the terminal group of the power supply line of the connector 57e. Is connected to a terminal on one end side opposite to the terminal.

  The power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2 respectively connected to different terminals of the connector 57e are connected on the shielding unit control board 57d and integrated with the power supply line VCC, and then various circuits and elements on the shielding unit control board 57d, for example, It is connected to serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 and pull-up resistors 1 and 2 described later. A light emitting diode 57f is connected to the integrated power supply line VCC so that a current flows from the connector 57e side to various circuits and the like side. The light emitting diode 57f emits light when at least one of the power supply line VCC1 or the power supply line VCC2 is connected to the connector 57e and the power supply VCC is supplied to various circuits on the shielding unit control board 57d. Neither the power supply line VCC1 nor the power supply line VCC2 is connected to the light emitting diode 57f so that no light is emitted when the power supply VCC is not supplied to various circuits on the shielding unit control board 57d. Whether or not the power supply VCC is supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d can be visually recognized based on the light emission state.

  On the shielding unit control board 57d, the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 received via the connector 57e are used to control the lighting mode of the parallel control signal 1 and the right LED 57c for controlling the lighting mode of the left LED 57b. Serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 for converting to parallel control signal 2, LED drive circuit 1 for outputting drive signal 1 for driving left LED 57b based on parallel control signal 1, and drive for driving right LED 57c based on parallel control signal 2 Serial control signal 2 received via LED drive circuit 2 and connector 57e that outputs signal 2 is converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6 for controlling the excitation mode of each excitation phase of shielding member operation motor 57a. Serial / parallel conversion circuit 2, shielded based on parallel control signals 3-6 Motor driving circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operating motor 57a by outputting excitation signals 1 to 4 for exciting the respective excitation phases of the material operating motor 57a, high signals on the signal lines of the parallel control signals 1 to 6 and Intrusion from the outside of the circuit through pull-up resistors 1 and 2, a connector 57e, etc. for pulling up the signal line to a predetermined voltage (voltage of power supply VCC (5V) or less) so that the Low signal can be transmitted accurately Various circuits and elements including noise removing circuits 1 and 2 for releasing and removing electrical noise due to static electricity and the like to the power supply side are mounted.

  In the shielding unit control board 57d, the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1 among the signal lines of the control signal connected via the connector 57e are connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1. The signal line of the parallel control signal 1 output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to the LED drive circuit 1. The signal line of the driving signal 1 output from the LED driving circuit 1 is connected to the left LED 57b. The signal line of the parallel control signal 2 output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to the LED drive circuit 2, and the signal line of the drive signal 2 output from the LED drive circuit 2 is connected to the right LED 57c. Connected.

  The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to the signal lines of the serial control signal 1, the clock signal 1, the parallel control signal 1, and the parallel control signal 2, and to the power supply line VCC. When supplied, it is in a state where it can function normally, converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into the parallel control signal 1 and the parallel control signal 2, and converts these parallel control signals 1 and 2 into LED Output to the drive circuits 1 and 2 is possible. When the power supply VCC is not supplied, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is not operated and is stopped, and the parallel control signal 1 and the parallel control signal 2 cannot be output.

  The left LED 57b is connected to the signal line of the drive signal 1 output from the LED drive circuit 1 and to the power source VDL, and the drive signal 1 for turning on the left LED 57b is input. The left LED 57b is turned on using the power supply VDL. The right LED 57c is connected to the signal line of the drive signal 2 output from the LED drive circuit 2 and is connected to the power source VDL, and the drive signal 2 for turning on the right LED 57c is input. Thus, the right LED 57c is turned on using the power supply VDL.

  The signal line for the parallel control signal 1 and the signal line for the parallel control signal 2 are connected to the power supply line VCC via the pull-up resistor 1. Thereby, when the power supply VCC is supplied, the signal lines of the parallel control signal 1 and the parallel control signal 2 are pulled up to a predetermined voltage.

  The signal line for the serial control signal 1 and the signal line for the clock signal 1 are connected to the power supply line VCC via the noise removal circuit 1. The noise removal circuit 1 includes a plurality of diodes, and the diodes are connected so that current can flow from the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1 toward the power supply line VCC. ing. When the power supply VCC is normally supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d, in the noise removal circuit 1, the voltage of the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1 is higher than the voltage on the power supply line VCC side. When such noise occurs, current flows from the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1 to the power supply line VCC, so that the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1 The generated noise is discharged to the power supply VCC side and removed.

  In the shielding unit control board 57d, the signal line of the serial control signal 2 and the signal line of the clock signal 2 among the signal lines of the control signal connected through the connector 57e are connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2. The signal line of the parallel control signal 3 output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to the motor drive circuit 1, and the signal line of the parallel control signal 4 output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is The signal line of the parallel control signal 5 connected to the drive circuit 2 and output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to the motor drive circuit 3 and the signal of the parallel control signal 6 output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2. The line is connected to the motor drive circuit 4. The signal line of the excitation signal 1 output from the motor drive circuit 1 is connected to the first phase of the excitation phase of the shielding member operation motor 57a, and the signal line of the excitation signal 2 output from the motor drive circuit 2 is The signal line of the excitation signal 3 connected to the second phase of the excitation phase of the shielding member operation motor 57a and output from the motor drive circuit 3 is connected to the third phase of the excitation phase of the shielding member operation motor 57a, and is driven by the motor. The signal line of the excitation signal 4 output from the circuit 4 is connected to the fourth phase of the excitation phase of the shielding member operation motor 57a.

  The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to the serial control signal 2, the clock signal 2, and the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and is connected to the power supply line VCC and supplied with the power supply VCC. The serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6, and these parallel control signals 3 to 6 are connected to the motor drive circuits 1 to 4. Can be output. When the power supply VCC is not supplied, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is not operated and is stopped, and the parallel control signals 3 to 6 cannot be output.

  Further, the excitation signals 1 to 4 are connected to the first to fourth excitation phases of the shielding member operation motor 57a, respectively, and the power source VDL is connected to each excitation phase. By inputting excitation signals 1 to 4 indicating excitation, the corresponding excitation phase is excited using the power supply VDL. The first to fourth excitation phases are arranged in a predetermined order by the signal lines of the excitation signals 1 to 4 (for example, the fourth phase, the first phase, and the first phase along the rotation direction of the shielding member operation motor 57a). , First phase and second phase, second phase, second phase and third phase, third phase, third phase and fourth phase, fourth phase, fourth phase and first phase, etc. The shielding member operating motor 57a is driven in a predetermined manner.

  When excitation signals 1 to 4 are input so as to excite all the excitation phases (first phase to fourth phase) at the same timing, the shielding member operating motor 57a is excited for all phases. Thus, the motor is maintained in a stopped state without rotating, but the current continues to flow from the power supply VDL to each excitation phase over the period in which the signal is input.

  Each signal line of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 is connected to the power supply line VCC via the pull-up resistor 2. Thus, when the power supply VCC is supplied, the signal lines of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 are pulled up to a predetermined voltage in the same manner as the parallel control signals 1 and 2 described above.

  The signal line for the serial control signal 2 and the signal line for the clock signal 2 are connected to the power supply line VCC via the noise removal circuit 2. The noise removal circuit 2 has the same configuration as the noise removal circuit 1 described above. When the power supply VCC is normally supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d, the noise removal circuit 2 has a signal line for the serial control signal 2. When noise occurs such that the voltage of the signal line of the clock signal 2 is higher than the voltage of the power supply line VCC, current flows from the signal line of the serial control signal 2 and the signal line of the clock signal 2 to the power supply line VCC. By flowing, noise generated in the signal line of the serial control signal 2 and the signal line of the clock signal 2 is released to the power supply VCC side and removed.

  Thus, in the shielding unit control board 57d of this modification, the power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2 branched from the power supply line VCC before being connected to the shielding unit control board 57d are connected to different terminals in the connector 57e, respectively. ing. That is, the power supply line VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 and the like is connected to the shielding unit control board 57d using two wires and two terminals of the connector 57e.

  The connector 57e has a plurality of terminals, a signal line such as a serial control signal 1 is connected to a terminal group on one end side, and power supply lines such as power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2 are connected to a terminal group on the other end side. The power supply line VCC1 is connected to the terminal on one end side of the terminal group to which the power supply line is connected, and the power supply line VCC2 is connected to the terminal on the other end side.

  The power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2 connected via the connector 57e are integrated with the power supply line VCC on the shielding unit control board 57d, and a light emitting diode 57f is connected to the integrated power supply line VCC, thereby controlling the shielding unit. The power supply VCC is supplied to the board 57d, and when a current flows from the connector 57e side to each circuit side such as the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1, the light emitting diode 57f emits light and the power supply VCC is supplied. Can be recognized.

  In the shielding unit control board 57d, the power line VCC connected via the connector 57e is connected to each circuit and element such as the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2, the noise elimination circuits 1 and 2, and the pull-up resistors 1 and 2. When the predetermined power supply (5 V) is supplied from the power supply line VCC, the circuits such as the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 can normally function, and the effect control CPU 120 provides the shielding unit control board 57d. The shielding member operation motor 57a, the left LED 57b, and the right LED 57c connected to the shielding unit control board 57d can be operated on the basis of the serial control signals 1 and 2 output to the above.

  The noise removal circuit 1 of the shielding unit control board 57d is connected to the signal line of the serial control signal 1, the clock signal 1, and the wiring of the power supply VCC, and the signal of the control signal is passed through the noise removal circuit 1. The line is connected to the wiring of the power supply VCC. In addition, the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 are input to each signal line at a voltage supplied from the effect control board 12, and the effect control board is provided on the control signal side of the noise removal circuit 1. A voltage corresponding to the output state of the signal from 12 is supplied. That is, the control signal side of the noise removal circuit 1 has a predetermined high voltage when the signal is transmitted by the serial control signal 2 and a predetermined low voltage when the signal is not transmitted. A voltage that changes in a range between a predetermined high voltage and a predetermined low voltage is applied at a predetermined cycle regardless of whether or not the signal is transmitted by the serial control signal 2. . When the power supply VCC is not normally supplied to the noise removal circuit 1, the voltage applied to the noise removal circuit 1 with the input of the serial control signal 1 or the clock signal 1 is a capacitance component in the noise removal circuit 1. By leveling with the inductance component, an almost constant voltage is output to the wiring side of the power supply VCC of the noise removal circuit 1. In such a case, an unintended voltage is applied to each of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 connected to the wiring of the power supply VCC via a pull-up resistor.

  The noise removal circuit 2 of the shielding unit control board 57d is connected to the signal lines of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 and the wiring of the power supply VCC, and the control signal signal is passed through the noise removal circuit 2. The line is connected to the wiring of the power supply VCC. In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are input to each signal line at a voltage supplied from the effect control board 12, and the effect control board is provided on the control signal side of the noise removal circuit 2. A voltage corresponding to the output state of the signal from 12 is supplied. That is, the control signal side of the noise removal circuit 2 has a predetermined high voltage when a signal is transmitted by the serial control signal 2, and a predetermined low voltage when the signal is not transmitted. A voltage that changes in a range between a predetermined high voltage and a predetermined low voltage is applied at a predetermined cycle regardless of whether or not the signal is transmitted by the serial control signal 2. . When the power supply VCC is not normally supplied to the noise removal circuit 2, the voltage applied to the noise removal circuit 2 with the input of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 is a capacitance component in the noise removal circuit 2. By leveling with the inductance component, an almost constant voltage is output to the wiring side of the power supply VCC of the noise removal circuit 1. In such a case, an unintended voltage is applied to each of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 connected to the wiring of the power supply VCC via a pull-up resistor.

  The voltage output from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2 to the wiring side of the power supply VCC with the input of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 is a sufficiently high voltage (the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 2). 4, the parallel control signals 1 to 6 are output by the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2. In spite of the absence, the voltage output from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2 acts as the parallel control signals 1 and 2 to operate the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 so that the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c are lit. Or act as parallel control signals 3 to 6 to operate the motor drive circuits 1 to 4 so as to simultaneously excite the respective excitation phases of the shielding member operation motor 57a. Then there is a possibility would. In particular, the clock signals 1 and 2 are signals in which the voltage becomes a high voltage at a predetermined cycle, and regardless of whether or not it is the timing for operating the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left LED 57b, and the right LED 57c. 12 is a signal that is continuously output to the shielding unit control board 57d, so that the LED drive circuit 1, 2 may output drive signals 1 and 2, and motor drive circuits 1 to 4 may output excitation signals 1 to 4. That is, when the power supply VCC is not normally supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d, the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left LED 57b, and the right LED 57c may be operated unintentionally.

  Some conventional gaming machines include a conversion circuit that converts a control signal output from a control board into a drive signal, and drives an electrical component such as an LED based on the drive signal. In such a configuration, for example, the power source used for the conversion circuit may be used for a circuit that removes noise of a control signal or a circuit that generates a drive signal. In such a case, the power source line is disconnected. When the supply of power is stopped due to the above, the clock signal superimposed on the control signal may be output from the control signal line to the drive signal line via the noise removal circuit. In such a case, the drive signal is output. In spite of not being done, an electric component will operate | move.

  On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present modification uses the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 as the parallel control signal 1. 2 is input from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs the signal to the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 and the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1 respectively. LED driving circuit 1 for lighting the left LED 57b according to the parallel control signal 1 and LED driving for lighting the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2 The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to a power supply VCC for operating the conversion circuit, and the power supply VCC is connected to the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1. Pull for pulling up the voltage of the signal line (second signal line) of the noise removal circuit 1 and the parallel control signals 1 and 2 for removing noise of the signal line (first signal line) of the control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 The power supply VCC is connected to the up resistor 1 and supplied through two power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2. In such a configuration, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is the serial control signal. 1 and a signal line (first signal line) of a clock signal 1 and a pull-up resistor 1 of a signal line (second signal line) of parallel control signals 1 and 2 in a configuration connected to a power supply VCC. Since it is difficult to stop the supply of the power supply VCC by being supplied via the two power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2, the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c operate unintentionally when the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped. Can be prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this modification converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the parallel control signal that is input from the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 3 to 6 and motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a, and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to a power supply VCC for operating the conversion circuit. The power supply VCC includes a noise removal circuit 2 for removing noise on the signal lines (first signal lines) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 and signal lines (first lines of the parallel control signals 3 to 6). Is connected to the voltage of the signal line) to the pull-up resistor 2 to be pulled up, the power supply VCC is configured to be supplied through the two power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2. In such a configuration, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into parallel control signals 3 to 6 is connected to the serial control signal. 2 and the noise removal circuit 2 of the clock signal 2 (first signal line) and the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 are connected to two power supply VCCs. Since the supply of the power supply VCC is difficult to stop by being supplied via the power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2, the shielding member operation motor 57a operates unintentionally when the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped. Can be prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 outputs the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1 The LED drive circuit 1 for lighting the left LED 57b in response to the signal and the LED drive circuit 3 for lighting the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2 In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are controlled in parallel. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the signals 3 to 6 and outputs them to the signal lines (fourth signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the signal lines (fourth signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 Motor driving circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operating motor 57a in response to parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2, and the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 to operate the conversion circuit. The power supply VCC is connected to the power supply VCC, and the power supply VCC is connected to the noise removal circuit 2 and the parallel control signals 1 and 2 for removing noise on the signal lines (third signal lines) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2. Is connected to a pull-up resistor 1 for pulling up the voltage of the signal line (second signal line), and the power supply VCC is supplied via two power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2. In such a configuration, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into parallel control signals 3 to 6 is connected to the serial control signal. 2 and the noise removal circuit 2 of the clock signal 2 (third signal line) and the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 are connected to two power supply VCCs. Since the supply of the power supply VCC is difficult to stop by being supplied via the power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2, the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c operate unintentionally when the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped. Can be prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 outputs the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1 The LED drive circuit 1 for lighting the left LED 57b in response to the signal and the LED drive circuit 3 for lighting the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2 The serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are serially controlled. The serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line 1 (the first signal line) of the signal 1 and the clock signal 1 are converted into the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the signal lines ( LED drive for lighting the left LED 57b in response to the parallel control signal 1 inputted from the signal line (second signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the parallel control signal 1 and 2 respectively. A circuit 1 and an LED drive circuit 3 that turns on the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2; and the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal The serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the second signal line (third signal line) are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6 for parallel control. Serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 for outputting to signal lines (fourth signal line) Nos. 3 to 6 and parallel control signals 3 to 6 inputted from signal lines (fourth signal line) for parallel control signals 3 to 6 Accordingly, the motor driving circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operating motor 57a are provided. The serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 are connected to a power supply VCC for operating the conversion circuit, and The power supply VCC is a voltage of the noise removal circuit 1 for removing noise on the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 and the signal lines (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. The power supply VCC is supplied via two power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2. In such a configuration, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 for converting the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is the serial control signal. 1 and clock signal 1 (first signal line) noise removal circuit 1 and parallel control signals 3 to 6 signal line (fourth signal line) pull-up resistor 2 are connected. Since the supply of the power supply VCC is difficult to stop by being supplied via the power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2, the shielding member operation motor 57a operates unintentionally when the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped. Can be prevented.

  In this modification, a serial / parallel conversion circuit that converts serial control signals and clock signals into parallel control signals and outputs them, and electrical components (shielding member operation motor 57a, left LED 57b, right side in accordance with the parallel control signals. The drive circuit for driving the LED 57c) is provided, but an electrical component other than the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left LED 57b, and the right LED 57c, such as a vibration motor, may be applied as an electrical component that is driven by the drive circuit.

  In the present modification, the power supply VCC is supplied via the two power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2 in the shielding unit control board 57d. May be supplied.

  Further, in this modification, the shielding unit control equipped with the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 for converting the serial control signal and the clock signal transmitted by the effect control CPU 120 into a parallel control signal for operating a predetermined electrical component. In the board 57d, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 is supplied via the two power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2, but the serial control signal and the clock signal transmitted by the CPU 103 are provided. In a control board equipped with a serial / parallel conversion circuit for converting the signal into a parallel control signal, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit may be supplied via a plurality of power supply lines. Even in the configuration, the power supply VCC is supplied through a plurality of power supply lines, so that the power supply Since the CC supplying hardly stopped, by the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped, it is possible to prevent the predetermined electrical component will operate unintentionally.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this modification is configured to supply a power supply VCC via a connector 57e to a shielding unit control board 57d on which circuits such as a serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 and motor drive circuits 1 to 4 are mounted. At the same time, the power supply line of the power supply VCC is branched to the power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2 before being connected to the shielding unit control board 57d, and one end side of a plurality of terminals to which the power supply including the power supply VCC is supplied in the connector 57e. The power supply line VCC1 is connected to the other terminal, and the power supply line VCC2 is connected to the terminal on the other end side, so that one end side terminal and the other end side terminal among the plurality of terminals to which power is supplied in the connector 57e. Is a configuration used to supply the power supply VCC. In such a configuration, it is difficult to stop the supply of the power supply VCC even if a predetermined connector connected to the connector 57e is disconnected.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. Thus, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the LED drive circuit 2 and the LED drive circuit 2 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2 The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to a power supply VCC for operating the conversion circuit, and the power supply VCC is connected to the serial control signal 1 and A noise removing circuit 1 for removing noise on the signal line (first signal line) of the lock signal 1 and a pull-up resistor 1 for pulling up the voltage of the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2. The light-emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCC, so that it can be confirmed whether or not the power supply VCC is supplied. In such a configuration, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to the noise removal circuit 1 for the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 1 for the second signal line. Since the presence or absence of the supply can be confirmed and the supply of the power supply VCC can be recognized, it is possible to prevent the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c from operating unintentionally.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this modification converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the parallel control signal that is input from the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 3 to 6 and motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a, and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to a power supply VCC for operating the conversion circuit. The power supply VCC includes a noise removal circuit 2 for removing noise on the signal lines (first signal lines) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 and signal lines (first lines of the parallel control signals 3 to 6). The signal line) is connected to a pull-up resistor 2 for pulling up the voltage, and the light-emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCC, so that the presence or absence of the supply of the power supply VCC can be confirmed. is there. In such a configuration, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to the noise removal circuit 2 for the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 2 for the second signal line. Since the presence or absence of the supply can be confirmed and the supply of the power supply VCC can be recognized, it is possible to prevent the shielding member operation motor 57a from operating unintentionally.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 outputs the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1 The LED drive circuit 1 for lighting the left LED 57b in response to the signal and the LED drive circuit 3 for lighting the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2 In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are controlled in parallel. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the signals 3 to 6 and outputs the signals to the signal lines (fourth signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the signal lines (fourth signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operating motor 57a in response to parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 to operate the conversion circuit. The power supply VCC is connected to the power supply VCC, and the power supply VCC is connected to the noise removal circuit 2 and the parallel control signals 1 and 2 for removing noise on the signal lines (third signal lines) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2. Is connected to the pull-up resistor 1 for pulling up the voltage of the signal line (second signal line), and the light-emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCC. Is a confirmation that you can configure the presence or absence of the paper. In such a configuration, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the third signal line into parallel control signals 3 to 6 is connected to the serial control signal. 2 and the signal line (third signal line) of the clock signal 2 and the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 in the configuration connected to the power supply VCC. Since the light-emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line, it can be confirmed whether or not the power supply VCC is supplied and the supply of the power supply VCC can be recognized. Therefore, the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c are intended. It is possible to prevent the operation without being performed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 outputs the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1 The LED drive circuit 1 for lighting the left LED 57b in response to the signal and the LED drive circuit 3 for lighting the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2 The serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are serially controlled. The serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line 1 (the first signal line) of the signal 1 and the clock signal 1 are converted into the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the signal lines ( LED drive for lighting the left LED 57b in response to the parallel control signal 1 inputted from the signal line (second signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the parallel control signal 1 and 2 respectively. A circuit 1 and an LED drive circuit 3 that turns on the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2; and the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal The serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the second signal line (third signal line) are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6 for parallel control. Serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 for outputting to signal lines (fourth signal line) Nos. 3 to 6 and parallel control signals 3 to 6 inputted from signal lines (fourth signal line) for parallel control signals 3 to 6 Accordingly, the motor driving circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operating motor 57a are provided. The serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 are connected to a power supply VCC for operating the conversion circuit, and The power supply VCC is a voltage of the noise removal circuit 1 for removing noise on the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 and the signal lines (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Is connected to a pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the power supply VCC, and a light-emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCC. In such a configuration, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 for converting the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is the serial control signal. 1 and a clock signal 1 (first signal line) noise removal circuit 1 and parallel control signals 3 to 6 signal line (fourth signal line) pull-up resistor 2 are connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCC. Since the light emitting diode 57f is connected, the presence or absence of the supply of the power supply VCC can be confirmed, and the supply of the power supply VCC can be recognized. Therefore, the shielding member operation motor 57a operates unintentionally Can be prevented.

  In this modification, the shielding unit control board 57d is configured such that the power VCC is supplied via the two power lines VCC1 and VCC2, and the light emitting diode 57f is connected to the power line of the power VCC. However, in the configuration in which the power supply VCC is supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d through one power supply line, the light emitting diode 57f may be connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCC. Even in such a configuration, since the light emitting diode 57f is connected to the power supply line of the power supply VCC, it can be confirmed whether or not the power supply VCC is supplied, and the supply of the power supply VCC can be recognized. It is possible to prevent the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left LED 57b, and the right LED 57c from operating unintentionally.

  Moreover, in the said modification, although the form where this invention was applied to the pachinko game machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, It is another example of a gaming machine. Slot machines where bets are set using medals and credits as gaming values, slot machines where betting numbers are set using gaming balls as gaming values, and bets using only credits as gaming values The present invention may be applied to a fully credit type slot machine for setting the number. When using a game ball as a game value, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls, and when 3 is set as the number of bets in the above modification, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the number of bets using.

(Modification 15)
Next, a modified example 15 of the pachinko gaming machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. In addition, since the structure of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present modification includes the same structure as that of Modification 14 described above, differences will be mainly described here.

  In the modified example 14, the power supply VCC is supplied through the two power lines VCC1 and VCC2 in the shielding unit control board 57d. However, in the modified example 15, as shown in FIG. The power supply VCC is supplied to the control board 57d through one power supply line, and the parallel control signals 1 and 2 of the signal lines of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 are connected to the power supply VCC side. In FIG. 2, a current-inhibiting circuit 1 for preventing the flow of current and the application of voltage from the power supply VCC side to the signal line side of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 and a parallel control signal 3 output by the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 On the power supply VCC side of the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines 6 to 6, current flows from the power supply VCC side to the signal line side of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. And Kaikomi prevention circuit 2 to stop, it is further provided configured shielding unit control board 57d.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the wrap prevention circuit 1 has one end connected to the signal line of the parallel control signal 1 and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2 via the pull-up resistor 1. The other end is connected to the power supply line VCC. The anti-rotation circuit 1 is configured using a Zener diode or the like, and the pull-up resistor is connected to the power line VCC side via the Zener diode so that no current flows from the power line VCC side to the pull-up resistor 1 side. One side is connected. In the anti-rotation circuit 1, the voltage on the wiring side of the power supply line VCC is determined to be an ON state in which the parallel control signals 1 to 6 are input in the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4. When the voltage threshold is exceeded, that is, when the voltage is a predetermined voltage (the voltage of the power supply VCC (5V)), the voltage of the power supply VCC is applied to the pull-up resistor 1 side, while the power supply line VCC For example, when the voltage is equal to or lower than a predetermined threshold value (threshold value for determining the ON state in which the parallel control signals 1 to 6 are input in the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4), the power line VCC When the power supply VCC is not normally supplied to the wiring side and the voltage associated with the input of the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signals 1 and 2 is output from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2, the voltage is pull Tsu and so will not be applied to up resistor 1 side.

  The wrap prevention circuit 2 has one end connected to each signal line of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 through the pull-up resistor 2 and the other end of the wrap prevention circuit 2 connected to the power supply line VCC. Yes. The wrap prevention circuit 2 has the same configuration as the wrap prevention circuit 1 and is configured using a Zener diode or the like. When the power supply VCC is not supplied, a current flows from the power line VCC side to the pull-up resistor 2 side. The power supply line VCC side and the pull-up resistor 2 side are connected via a Zener diode or the like so that current does not flow. In the wrap prevention circuit 2, as in the wrap prevention circuit 1, the voltage on the wiring side of the power supply line VCC is set to a predetermined threshold value (the parallel control signals 1 to 6 are applied to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4). If it exceeds the threshold value of the input voltage that is determined to be in the ON state, that is, if it is a predetermined voltage (voltage of the power supply VCC (5 V)), the voltage of the power supply VCC is applied to the pull-up resistor 2 side. Thus, the voltage on the wiring side of the power supply line VCC is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value (threshold value of the voltage for determining that the parallel control signals 1 to 6 are input in the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4). In this case, for example, the power supply VCC is not normally supplied to the wiring side of the power supply line VCC, and the voltage associated with the input of the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signals 1 and 2 is output from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2. Like If, the voltage is turned so that it can not be applied to the pull-up resistor 2 side.

  As described above, in the shielding unit control board 57d of the present modified example, when the power supply VCC is not supplied by connecting the pull-up resistor 1 and the power supply line VCC via the wraparound prevention circuit 1, The current discharged from the noise elimination circuits 1 and 2 to the power supply line VCC side flows from the power supply line VCC to the pull-up resistor 1 side, that is, the signal line of the parallel control signal 1 and the signal line of the parallel control signal 2. The voltage output from the noise elimination circuits 1 and 2 is the voltage associated with the input of the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signals 1 and 2 is the signal line and the parallel control signal of the parallel control signal 1 on the pull-up resistor 1 side. 2 is prevented from being applied to the two signal lines.

  Further, in the shielding unit control board 57d of this modification, the pull-up resistor 2 and the power supply line VCC are connected via the wraparound prevention circuit 2 so that the above-described noise removal is performed when the power supply VCC is not supplied. The current discharged from the circuits 1 and 2 to the power supply line VCC side flows from the power supply line VCC side to the pull-up resistor 2 side, that is, the signal lines of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, the serial control signal 1, 2 and the voltage accompanying the input of the clock signals 1 and 2 is prevented from being applied to the signal lines of the parallel control signals 3 to 4 on the pull-up resistor 2 side. It is like that.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. Thus, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the LED drive circuit 2 and the LED drive circuit 2 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2 The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to a power supply VCC for operating the conversion circuit, and the power supply VCC is connected to the serial control signal 1 and A noise removing circuit 1 for removing noise on the signal line (first signal line) of the lock signal 1 and a pull-up resistor 1 for pulling up the voltage of the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2. The circuit includes a wraparound prevention circuit 1 that is connected and can prevent a current from flowing from the noise removal circuit 1 to the second signal line. In such a configuration, in the configuration in which the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to the noise removal circuit 1 of the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 1 of the second signal line, the noise removal circuit The wraparound prevention circuit 1 capable of preventing the current from flowing from the first signal line to the second signal line is provided. Even when the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped, the current may flow from the noise removal circuit 1 to the second signal line. Therefore, current does not flow into the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 connected to the second signal line, and the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c can be prevented from operating unintentionally.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this modification converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the parallel control signal that is input from the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 3 to 6 and motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a, and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to a power supply VCC for operating the conversion circuit. The power supply VCC includes a noise removal circuit 2 for removing noise on the signal lines (first signal lines) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 and signal lines (first lines of the parallel control signals 3 to 6). It is connected to the voltage of the signal line) to the pull-up resistor 2 to be pulled up, a configuration including the Kaikomi prevention circuit 2 capable of preventing from the noise elimination circuit 2 current from flowing to the second signal line. In such a configuration, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to the noise removal circuit 2 for the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 2 for the second signal line. 2 is provided to prevent the current from flowing from 2 to the second signal line, and even if the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped, the current may flow from the noise removal circuit 2 to the second signal line. Therefore, current does not flow into the motor drive circuits 1 to 4 connected to the second signal line, and the shielding member operating motor 57a can be prevented from operating unintentionally.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 outputs the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1 The LED drive circuit 1 for lighting the left LED 57b in response to the signal and the LED drive circuit 3 for lighting the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2 In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are controlled in parallel. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the signals 3 to 6 and outputs them to the signal lines (fourth signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the signal lines (fourth signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 Motor driving circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operating motor 57a in response to parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2, and the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 to operate the conversion circuit. The power supply VCC is connected to the power supply VCC, and the power supply VCC is connected to the noise removal circuit 2 and the parallel control signals 1 and 2 for removing noise on the signal lines (third signal lines) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2. And a wrap-around prevention circuit 1 that is connected to a pull-up resistor 1 that pulls up the voltage of the signal line (second signal line) and that can prevent a current from flowing from the noise removal circuit 2 to the second signal line. It is formed. In such a configuration, in the configuration in which the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to the noise removal circuit 2 of the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 1 of the second signal line, the noise removal circuit 2 is provided to prevent the current from flowing from 2 to the second signal line, and even if the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped, the current may flow from the noise removal circuit 2 to the second signal line. Therefore, current does not flow into the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 connected to the second signal line, and the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c can be prevented from operating unintentionally.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 outputs the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1 The LED drive circuit 1 for lighting the left LED 57b in response to the signal and the LED drive circuit 3 for lighting the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2 The serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are serially controlled. The serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line 1 (the first signal line) of the signal 1 and the clock signal 1 are converted into the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the signal lines ( LED drive for lighting the left LED 57b in response to the parallel control signal 1 inputted from the signal line (second signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the parallel control signal 1 and 2 respectively. A circuit 1 and an LED drive circuit 3 that turns on the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2; and the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal The serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the second signal line (third signal line) are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6 for parallel control. Serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 for outputting to signal lines (fourth signal line) Nos. 3 to 6 and parallel control signals 3 to 6 inputted from signal lines (fourth signal line) for parallel control signals 3 to 6 Accordingly, the motor driving circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operating motor 57a are provided. The serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 are connected to a power supply VCC for operating the conversion circuit, and The power supply VCC is a voltage of the noise removal circuit 1 for removing noise on the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 and the signal lines (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Is connected to a pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the signal, and includes a wraparound prevention circuit 2 that can prevent a current from flowing from the noise removal circuit 1 to the fourth signal line. In such a configuration, in the configuration in which the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to the noise removal circuit 1 of the first signal line and the pull-up resistor 2 of the fourth signal line, the noise removal circuit The wrap prevention circuit 2 that can prevent the current from flowing from 1 to the fourth signal line is provided, and even if the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped, the current may flow from the noise removal circuit 1 to the fourth signal line. Therefore, the current does not flow into the motor drive circuits 1 to 4 connected to the fourth signal line, and the shielding member operating motor 57a can be prevented from operating unintentionally.

  In this modification, the wraparound prevention circuits 1 and 2 are configured using a Zener diode, and by connecting the power supply line VCC side and the signal line side of the parallel control signal via the Zener diode, When the power supply VCC is not supplied, current flows from the power supply line VCC side to the signal line side of the parallel control signal, and the voltage associated with the input of the serial control signal and the clock signal is output from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2. The voltage is not applied to the signal lines of the parallel control signals 1 to 6, but an anti-rotation circuit may be configured using an electronic component other than a Zener diode. For example, a transistor, When the power supply VCC is not supplied to the power supply line VCC side of the wraparound prevention circuit using the FET, the signal of the parallel control signal from the power supply line VCC side of the wraparound prevention circuit It may be configured to cut off the application of current flow and the voltage to the side.

  Further, in this modification, the shielding unit control equipped with the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 for converting the serial control signal and the clock signal transmitted by the effect control CPU 120 into a parallel control signal for operating a predetermined electrical component. The circuit board 57d is configured to include a wraparound prevention circuit capable of preventing the current from the noise removal circuit of the signal line for the serial control signal and the clock signal from flowing into the signal line for the parallel control signal. In a control board equipped with a serial / parallel conversion circuit for converting a control signal and a clock signal into a parallel control signal, the current from the noise removal circuit of the signal line of the serial control signal and the clock signal input from the CPU 103 is the parallel control signal. Equipped with a wraparound prevention circuit that can prevent flow into the signal line Even in such a configuration, even when the supply of the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit or the like is stopped, current may flow from the noise removal circuit to the signal line of the parallel control signal. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a predetermined electrical component from operating unintentionally.

  Although the modified example 15 of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this modified example, and modifications and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of the modification 14 has the same effect as that described in the modification 14. Further, the modified example illustrated for the modified example 14 can also be applied to the modified example 15.

(Modification 16)
Modification 16 of the pachinko gaming machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. In addition, since the structure of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present modification includes the same structure as that of Modification 14 described above, differences will be mainly described here.

  In the modified example 14, the power supply VCC is supplied via the two power lines VCC1 and VCC2 in the shielding unit control board 57d. However, in the present modified example 16, as shown in FIG. The power supply VCC is supplied to the control board 57d through a single power supply line. When the power supply VCC is not supplied, a current is prevented from flowing into the LED drive circuit 1 from the power supply line VCC side. The shielding unit control board 57d includes the anti-intrusion circuit 1 and the anti-inversion circuit 2 that prevents the current flow from the power source line VCC and the application of voltage to the LED drive circuit 2 when the power source VCC is not supplied. And a wraparound prevention circuit 3 for preventing current from flowing into the motor drive circuit 1 from the power supply line VCC side when the power supply VCC is not supplied. When the power supply VCC is not supplied, the wrap prevention circuit 4 prevents current from flowing into the motor drive circuit 2 from the power supply line VCC side. When the power supply VCC is not supplied, the motor drive circuit 3 is supplied with power. A circuit for preventing a current from flowing in from the line VCC side, and a circuit for preventing a current from flowing from the power line VCC and applying a voltage to the motor drive circuit 4 when the power supply VCC is not supplied. It is the structure further equipped with the blocking unit control board 57d.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the wraparound prevention circuit 1 is arranged on the signal line of the parallel control signal 1, and one end of the wraparound prevention circuit 1 is connected to the power supply line VCC via the pull-up resistor 1, The other end side of the insertion prevention circuit 1 is connected to the LED drive circuit 1 through the signal line. The anti-rotation circuit 1 is configured using a Zener diode, and when the power supply VCC is not supplied, the Zener diode is interposed so that no current flows from the power supply line VCC side to the LED drive circuit 1 side. Thus, the power supply line VCC side and the LED drive circuit 1 side are connected. In the wraparound prevention circuit 1, the voltage of the signal line of the parallel control signal 1 on the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 side is set to a predetermined threshold value (the voltage for determining the ON state where the parallel control signal 1 is input in the LED drive circuit 1). If the parallel control signal 1 is output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 at a normal voltage, the voltage of the control signal is applied to the LED drive circuit 1 side and the parallel control signal is output. 1 is transmitted, the voltage of the signal line of the parallel control signal 1 on the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 side is set to a predetermined threshold value (the voltage for determining that the parallel control signal 1 is input in the LED drive circuit 1) For example, the power supply VCC is not normally supplied to the wiring side of the power supply line VCC, and the serial / parallel converter circuit 1 If the control signal 1 is not output normally and the noise removal circuits 1 and 2 output the voltages associated with the input of the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signals 1 and 2, There is no application to the drive circuit 1 side.

  The wrap prevention circuit 2 is disposed on the signal line of the parallel control signal 2, and one end side of the wrap prevention circuit 2 is connected to the power supply line VCC via the pull-up resistor 1, and the other end of the wrap prevention circuit 2. The side is connected to the LED drive circuit 2 via the signal line. The anti-rotation circuit 2 has the same configuration as the anti-rotation circuit 1 and prevents a current from flowing from the power supply line VCC side to the LED drive circuit 2 side when the power supply VCC is not supplied. The power supply line VCC side and the LED drive circuit 2 side are connected via the. In the wraparound prevention circuit 2, as in the wraparound prevention circuit 1, when the parallel control signal 2 is output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 with a normal voltage, the voltage of the control signal is the LED drive circuit 1. When the parallel control signal 1 is transmitted to the power supply line VCC and the power supply VCC is not normally supplied to the wiring side of the power supply line VCC, the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signal 1 are supplied from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2. 2 is not applied to the LED drive circuit 1 side.

  The wrap prevention circuit 3 is disposed on the signal line of the parallel control signal 3, and one end side of the wrap prevention circuit 3 is connected to the power supply line VCC via the pull-up resistor 2, and the other end of the wrap prevention circuit 3. The side is connected to the motor drive circuit 1 via the signal line. The wrap prevention circuit 3 has the same configuration as the wrap prevention circuit 1 and prevents a current from flowing from the power supply line VCC side to the motor drive circuit 1 side when the power supply VCC is not supplied. The power supply line VCC side and the motor drive circuit 1 side are connected via the. In the wrap prevention circuit 3, as in the case of the wrap prevention circuit 1, when the parallel control signal 3 is output from the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 at a normal voltage, the voltage of the control signal is the motor drive circuit 1. When the parallel control signal 3 is transmitted to the power supply side and the power supply VCC is not normally supplied to the wiring side of the power supply line VCC, the serial control signals 1 and 2 and the clock signal 1 are supplied from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2. The voltage accompanying the input of 2 is not applied to the motor drive circuit 1 side. Hereinafter, the wraparound prevention circuits 4 to 6 are the same as the wraparound prevention circuit 3.

  The anti-rotation circuits 4 to 6 are arranged on the signal lines of the parallel control signals 4 to 6, and one end sides of the anti-rotation circuits 4 to 6 are connected to the power supply line VCC via the pull-up resistor 2. The other end sides of the insertion prevention circuits 4 to 6 are connected to the motor drive circuits 2 to 4 through the signal lines. The wrap prevention circuits 4 to 6 have the same configuration as that of the wrap prevention circuit 1 and no current flows from the power line VCC side to the motor drive circuits 2 to 4 side when the power supply VCC is not supplied. Thus, the power supply line VCC side and the motor drive circuits 2 to 4 side are connected via the Zener diode.

  Thus, in the shielding unit control board 57d of this modification, the circuit is connected between the connection points of the parallel control signals 1 to 6 and the pull-up resistors 1 and 2 and the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4. By providing the anti-loading circuits 1 to 6 respectively, when the power supply VCC is not supplied, the current and voltage discharged from the noise removal circuits 1 and 2 to the power supply line VCC side are the LED drive circuits 1 and 2. The motor drive circuits 1 to 4 are prevented from going around.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. Thus, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the LED drive circuit 2 and the LED drive circuit 2 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2 The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to a power supply VCC for operating the conversion circuit, and the power supply VCC is connected to the serial control signal 1 and A noise removing circuit 1 for removing noise on the signal line (first signal line) of the lock signal 1 and a pull-up resistor 1 for pulling up the voltage of the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2. It is connected, and it is the structure provided with the wraparound prevention circuits 1 and 2 which can prevent the electric current from the noise removal circuit 1 from flowing into the LED drive circuits 1 and 2. FIG. In such a configuration, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is the serial control signal. 1 and a noise removal circuit 1 of a signal line (first signal line) of a clock signal 1 and a noise removal circuit in a configuration connected to a pull-up resistor 1 of a signal line (second signal line) of parallel control signals 1 and 2. 1 is provided with wraparound prevention circuits 1 and 2 that can prevent the current from 1 from flowing to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2, and even if the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped, the noise removal circuit 1 changes to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2. Since current is prevented from flowing in, it is possible to prevent the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c from operating unintentionally.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this modification converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the parallel control signal that is input from the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 3 to 6 and motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a, and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to a power supply VCC for operating the conversion circuit. The power supply VCC includes a noise removal circuit 2 for removing noise on the signal lines (first signal lines) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 and signal lines (first lines of the parallel control signals 3 to 6). The signal line is connected to a pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the voltage, and includes a wraparound prevention circuit 3 to 6 that can prevent a current from the noise removal circuit 2 from flowing to the motor drive circuits 1 to 4. It is. In such a configuration, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into parallel control signals 3 to 6 is connected to the serial control signal. 2 and the noise removal circuit 2 of the clock signal 2 (first signal line) and the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 are connected to the noise removal circuit 2 from the noise removal circuit 2. Provided with anti-rotation circuits 3 to 6 that can prevent current from flowing to the motor drive circuits 1 to 4, even if the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped, the current flows from the noise removal circuit 2 to the motor drive circuits 1 to 4. Therefore, the shielding member operating motor 57a can be prevented from operating unintentionally.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 outputs the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1 The LED drive circuit 1 for lighting the left LED 57b in response to the signal and the LED drive circuit 3 for lighting the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2 In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are controlled in parallel. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the signals 3 to 6 and outputs the signals to the signal lines (fourth signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6, and the signal lines (fourth signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 Motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operating motor 57a in response to parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 to operate the conversion circuit. The power supply VCC is connected to the power supply VCC, and the power supply VCC is connected to the noise removal circuit 2 and the parallel control signals 1 and 2 for removing noise on the signal lines (third signal lines) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2. Is connected to a pull-up resistor 1 for pulling up the voltage of the signal line (second signal line) of the signal line, and the current from the noise removal circuit 2 can be prevented from flowing to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2. 1,2 is configured to include. In such a configuration, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into parallel control signals 3 to 6 is connected to the serial control signal. 2 and the noise removal circuit 2 of the clock signal 2 (third signal line) and the pull-up resistor 1 of the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 from the noise removal circuit 2 Provided with anti-rotation circuits 1 and 2 that can prevent current from flowing to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2, even if the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped, the current flows from the noise removal circuit 2 to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2. Therefore, the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c can be prevented from operating unintentionally.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 outputs the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1 The LED drive circuit 1 for lighting the left LED 57b in response to the signal and the LED drive circuit 3 for lighting the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2 The serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are serially controlled. The serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line 1 (the first signal line) of the signal 1 and the clock signal 1 are converted into the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the signal lines ( LED drive for lighting the left LED 57b in response to the parallel control signal 1 inputted from the signal line (second signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the parallel control signal 1 and 2 respectively. A circuit 1 and an LED drive circuit 3 that turns on the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2; and the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal The serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the second signal line (third signal line) are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6 for parallel control. Serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 for outputting to signal lines (fourth signal line) Nos. 3 to 6 and parallel control signals 3 to 6 inputted from signal lines (fourth signal line) for parallel control signals 3 to 6 Accordingly, the motor driving circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operating motor 57a are provided. The serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 are connected to a power supply VCC for operating the conversion circuit, and The power supply VCC is a voltage of the noise removal circuit 1 for removing noise on the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 and the signal lines (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. Is connected to a pull-up resistor 2 that pulls up the current, and includes a wraparound prevention circuit 3 to 6 that can prevent a current from the noise removal circuit 1 from flowing to the motor drive circuits 1 to 4. In such a configuration, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 for converting the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is the serial control signal. 1 and the noise removal circuit 1 of the clock signal 1 (first signal line) and the pull-up resistor 2 of the signal lines (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 are connected from the noise removal circuit 1. Provided with wrap-around prevention circuits 3 to 6 that can prevent current from flowing to the motor drive circuits 1 to 4, even if the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped, the current flows from the noise removal circuit 1 to the motor drive circuits 1 to 4. Therefore, the shielding member operating motor 57a can be prevented from operating unintentionally.

  In this modification, the wrap-around prevention circuits 1 to 6 are configured using Zener diodes, and the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 are connected from the signal line side of the parallel control signal when the power supply VCC is not supplied. The motor drive circuits 1 to 4 are configured to prevent current from flowing, but may be configured to form a wraparound prevention circuit using electronic components other than a zener diode, for example, using transistors or FETs. When the power supply VCC is not supplied to the power supply line VCC side of the pull-up resistors 1 and 2, current flows from the signal line side of the parallel control signal to the LED drive circuits 1 and 2 and the motor drive circuits 1 to 4 side. The structure which interrupts | blocks may be sufficient.

  Further, in this modification, the serial control signal and the clock are provided in the shielding unit control board 57d equipped with the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 for converting the serial control signal and the clock signal transmitted from the effect control CPU 120 into the parallel control signal. A serial control signal and a clock signal transmitted by the CPU 103 are provided with a wraparound prevention circuit capable of preventing the current from the noise removal circuits 1 to 6 of the signal line from flowing into the drive circuit of a predetermined electrical component. In a control board equipped with a serial / parallel conversion circuit for converting a signal into a parallel control signal, a current from a noise removal circuit of a signal line of a serial control signal and a clock signal input from the CPU 103 flows into a drive circuit of a predetermined electrical component It may be configured with a wraparound prevention circuit that can prevent Even in the configuration, even if the supply of the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit or the like is stopped, it is possible to prevent a current from flowing from the noise removal circuit to the drive circuit. It is possible to prevent the operation without being performed.

  Although the modification 16 of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this modification, and modifications and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of the modification 14 has the same effect as that described in the modification 14. Further, the modified example illustrated for the modified example 14 can also be applied to the modified example 16.

(Modification 17)
A variation 17 of the pachinko gaming machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. In addition, since the structure of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present modification includes the same structure as that of Modification 14 described above, differences will be mainly described here.

  In the modified example 14, the power supply lines including the power supply lines VCC1 and VCC2 (5V) and the power supply line VDL (12V) are connected to the connector 57e of the shielding unit control board 57d, and the shielding unit control is performed via the connector 57e. A power supply VCC for operating various circuits and elements of the board 57d is supplied, and a power supply for operating electrical components (shielding member operation motor 57a, left LED 57b, right LED 57c) connected to the shielding unit control board 57d. In this modification 17, the power supply VDL is supplied through the connector 57e while the power supply VCC is not supplied, and the power supply VDL (12V) is supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d. A step-down circuit for generating VCC (5 V) is provided, and a shield unit control board 57d is provided. It is configured to generate a power supply VCC.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46A, a step-down circuit that generates power VCC (5V) from power VDL (12V) is mounted on the shielding unit control board 57d, and is supplied via a connector 57e. The power supply line of the power supply VDL is branched and one end is connected to the step-down circuit, and the other end is connected to the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left LED 57b, the right LED 57c (not shown), and the like. In the step-down circuit, the power supply VCC is generated from the power supply VDL, and the predetermined circuit or element (elements ( (Not shown).

  As described above, the shielding unit control board 57d of the present modification is provided with a step-down circuit for generating the power supply VCC from the power supply VDL, and the power supply VDL supplied through the connector 57e is used as the shielding member operation motor 57a, Since the power supply VCC is generated from the power supply VDL by the step-down circuit and supplied to the various circuits such as the serial / parallel conversion boards 1 and 2 while being supplied to the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c, the serial / parallel conversion is performed. When the supply of the power supply VCC to the substrates 1 and 2 is stopped, the power supply VDL to the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left LED 57b, and the right LED 57c is also stopped, and the shielding member operation motor 57a and the like do not operate. It is like that.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. Thus, the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 that is input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 The LED drive circuit 1 that lights the left LED 57b according to the LED drive circuit 2 and the LED drive circuit 2 that lights the right LED 57c according to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2 The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 is connected to a power supply VCC for operating the conversion circuit, and the power supply VCC is connected to the serial control signal 1 and A noise removing circuit 1 for removing noise on the signal line (first signal line) of the lock signal 1 and a pull-up resistor 1 for pulling up the voltage of the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2. The power supply VCC is connected and is generated from the power supply VDL for driving the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c. In such a configuration, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 that converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is the serial control signal. 1 and a signal line (first signal line) of the clock signal 1 and a pull-up resistor 1 of the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 in the configuration connected to the left LED 57b, Since the power supply VCC is generated from the power supply VDL for driving the right LED 57c, the supply of the power supply VDL is also stopped when the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped, so that the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c operate unintentionally. Can be prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this modification converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 into parallel control signals 3 to 6. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that outputs to the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the parallel control signal that is input from the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 3 to 6 and motor drive circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operation motor 57a, and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 is connected to a power supply VCC for operating the conversion circuit. The power supply VCC includes a noise removal circuit 2 for removing noise on the signal lines (first signal lines) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 and signal lines (first lines of the parallel control signals 3 to 6). The voltage of the signal line) is connected to a pull-up resistor 2 to pull up, the power supply VCC is configured to be generated from the power supply VDL for driving the shielding member moving motor 57a. In such a configuration, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into parallel control signals 3 to 6 is connected to the serial control signal. 2 and a clock signal 2 (first signal line) noise removal circuit 2 and parallel control signals 3 to 6 signal line (second signal line) pull-up resistor 2 in a configuration connected to the shielding member operation motor 57a. Since the power supply VCC is generated from the power supply VDL for driving, the supply of the power supply VDL is also stopped when the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped, so that the shielding member operating motor 57a is prevented from operating unintentionally. it can.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 outputs the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1 The LED drive circuit 1 for lighting the left LED 57b in response to the signal and the LED drive circuit 3 for lighting the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2 In addition, the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are controlled in parallel. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the signals 3 to 6 and outputs them to the signal lines (fourth signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 and the signal lines (fourth signal lines) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6 Motor driving circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operating motor 57a in response to parallel control signals 3 to 6 input from the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2, and the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 to operate the conversion circuit. The power supply VCC is connected to the power supply VCC, and the power supply VCC is connected to the noise removal circuit 2 and the parallel control signals 1 and 2 for removing noise on the signal lines (third signal lines) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2. Is connected to a pull-up resistor 1 for pulling up the voltage of the second signal line (second signal line), and the power supply VCC is generated from the power supply VDL for driving the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c. It is configured to be. In such a configuration, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 that converts the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the first signal line into parallel control signals 3 to 6 is connected to the serial control signal. 2 and the clock signal 2 (third signal line) noise removing circuit 2 and the parallel control signals 1 and 2 signal line (second signal line) pull-up resistor 1 are connected, the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c are connected. Since the power supply VCC is generated from the power supply VDL for driving, the supply of the power supply VDL is also stopped when the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped, so that the left LED 57b and the right LED 57c are prevented from operating unintentionally. it can.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this modification converts the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 into parallel control signals 1 and 2. The serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 outputs the signal lines (second signal lines) of the parallel control signals 1 and 2 respectively, and the parallel control signal 1 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 1 The LED drive circuit 1 for lighting the left LED 57b in response to the signal and the LED drive circuit 3 for lighting the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2 The serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the signal line (third signal line) of the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 are serially controlled. The serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the signal line 1 (the first signal line) of the signal 1 and the clock signal 1 are converted into the parallel control signals 1 and 2, and the signal lines ( LED drive for lighting the left LED 57b in response to the parallel control signal 1 inputted from the signal line (second signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the parallel control signal 1 and 2 respectively. A circuit 1 and an LED drive circuit 3 that turns on the right LED 57c in response to the parallel control signal 2 input from the signal line (second signal line) of the parallel control signal 2; and the serial control signal 2 and the clock signal The serial control signal 2 and the clock signal 2 input from the second signal line (third signal line) are converted into parallel control signals 3 to 6 for parallel control. Serial / parallel conversion circuit 2 for outputting to signal lines (fourth signal line) Nos. 3 to 6 and parallel control signals 3 to 6 inputted from signal lines (fourth signal line) for parallel control signals 3 to 6 Accordingly, the motor driving circuits 1 to 4 for driving the shielding member operating motor 57a are provided. The serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 are connected to a power supply VCC for operating the conversion circuit, and The power supply VCC is a voltage of the noise removal circuit 1 for removing noise on the signal line (first signal line) of the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 and the signal lines (fourth signal line) of the parallel control signals 3 to 6. The power supply VCC is generated from the power supply VDL for driving the shielding member operating motor 57a. In such a configuration, the power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1 for converting the serial control signal 1 and the clock signal 1 input from the first signal line into the parallel control signals 1 and 2 is the serial control signal. 1 and a noise removal circuit 1 for clock signal 1 (first signal line) and a pull-up resistor 2 for signal lines (fourth signal line) for parallel control signals 3 to 6, a shielding member operation motor 57 a is connected. Since the power supply VCC is generated from the power supply VDL for driving, the supply of the power supply VDL is also stopped when the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped, so that the shielding member operating motor 57a is prevented from operating unintentionally. it can.

  In this modified example, the shielding unit control board 57d is provided with a step-down circuit for generating the power supply VCC from the power supply VDL, so that the supply of the power supply VCC is stopped when the power supply VDL is not supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d. In addition, the supply of power VDL to the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left LED 57b, and the right LED 57c is stopped. For example, as shown in FIG. It is also possible to connect an FET element or the like to the power supply VCC and the power supply VDL so that the power supply VDL is supplied to the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left LED 57b, and the right LED 57c when the power supply VCC is supplied to the power supply VCC. With such a configuration, when the power supply VCC is not supplied to the shielding unit control board 57d, the supply of the power VDL to the shielding member operation motor 57a, the left LED 57b, and the right LED 57c is stopped, and the shielding member operation is performed. The motor 57a and the like can be prevented from operating.

  Further, in this modification, the shielding unit control equipped with the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 for converting the serial control signal and the clock signal transmitted by the effect control CPU 120 into a parallel control signal for operating a predetermined electrical component. The board 57d is configured to include a step-down circuit that generates a power supply VCC for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1 and 2 from a power supply VDL for operating predetermined electrical components. In a control board equipped with a serial / parallel conversion circuit for converting a control signal and a clock signal into a parallel control signal for operating a predetermined electrical component, an operating power source for operating the serial / parallel conversion circuit is A power generation circuit that generates power from an operating power supply for operating electrical components May be configured to include, in such an arrangement, when the supply of operating power is stopped since the stopping supply of operation power, it is possible to prevent the predetermined electrical component will operate unintentionally.

  Although the modified example 17 of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this modified example, and modifications and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of the modification 14 has the same effect as that described in the modification 14. Further, the modified example illustrated for the modified example 14 can also be applied to the modified example 17.

(12) A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A movable body (for example, a movable body 250, a second effect body 900, a third movable body, etc.) provided to be operable between an origin position and a position away from the origin position;
Driving means for operating the movable body;
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body by the drive means (for example, the effect control CPU 120),
The control means is a first operation control for positioning the movable body at the origin position (for example, when the production control CPU 120 does not detect steps S105 to S114 of the second initialization process as the first operation control). The second control (for example, the production control CPU 120) for confirming that the movable body can operate normally, and the operation control and the part that executes the operation control during detection in steps S120 to S128). As the second operation control, a part for executing the operation control for actual operation confirmation in steps S201 to S213 of the second initialization process) and the third operation control for performing the effect by the movable body (for example, for effect control) (The control in which the CPU 120 executes the movable body effect in the period when the symbol variation display is executed as the third operation control or the big hit gaming state) It is possible to perform,
In the second operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate within a range of a first speed and a second speed that is faster than the first speed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is used for confirming the actual operation). When performing motion control, control is performed so that the movable body operates at a speed within the range of the lowest speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the highest speed (high speed) as the second speed that is faster than the lowest speed. In the first operation control, the movable body is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the first speed in the second operation control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 serves as the first operation control). When non-detection operation control or detection operation control is executed, a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (in this embodiment, the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control Same speed In the part which controls so that the movable member is operated)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the first operation control, the movable body operates at a speed that can be stopped at any timing, and thus can be safely positioned at the origin position.

(13) In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a game,
A control signal input from the first signal line (the signal line for serial control signal 1 and the signal line for clock signal 1) is converted into a drive signal and output to the second signal line (the signal line for parallel control signals 1 and 2). A conversion circuit (serial / parallel conversion circuit 1),
Drive circuits (LED drive circuits 1 and 2) for driving electrical components (left LED 57b, right LED 57c) in accordance with a drive signal input from the second signal line;
With
A predetermined power supply (power supply VCC) is connected to the conversion circuit to operate the conversion circuit, and the predetermined power supply is a noise removal circuit (noise removal circuit) for removing noise of the first signal line. 1) and a pull-up circuit (pull-up resistor 1) for pulling up the voltage of the second signal line,
The predetermined power is supplied through a plurality of wirings (power supply lines VCC1, VCC2).
According to this feature, the predetermined power source for operating the conversion circuit that converts the control signal input from the first signal line into the drive signal includes the noise removal circuit for the first signal line and the pull-up circuit for the second signal line. In the configuration connected to, it is difficult to stop the supply of the predetermined power because the predetermined power is input through a plurality of wirings. It can prevent operating.

(14) In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a game,
The first control signal input from the first signal line (the signal line of the serial control signal 1 and the signal line of the clock signal 1) is converted into the first drive signal and the second signal line (the signals of the parallel control signals 1 and 2). A first conversion circuit (serial / parallel conversion circuit 1) that outputs to the line),
A first drive circuit (LED drive circuits 1 and 2) for driving a first electrical component (left LED 57b, right LED 57c) in response to a first drive signal input from the second signal line;
The second control signal input from the third signal line (the signal line of the serial control signal 2 and the signal line of the clock signal 2) is converted into the second drive signal, and the fourth signal line (the signals of the parallel control signals 3 to 6) is converted. A second conversion circuit (serial / parallel conversion circuit 2) that outputs to the line),
A second drive circuit (motor drive circuits 1 to 4) for driving a second electrical component (shielding member operation motor 57a) in response to a second drive signal input from the fourth signal line;
With
A predetermined power supply (power supply VCC) is connected to the first conversion circuit and the second conversion circuit for operating the first conversion circuit and the second conversion circuit, and the predetermined power supply is connected to the first conversion circuit and the second conversion circuit. A noise removal circuit (noise removal circuit 1) for removing noise on the signal line and a pull-up circuit (pull-up resistor 2) for pulling up the voltage of the fourth signal line;
The predetermined power is supplied through a plurality of wirings (power supply lines VCC1, VCC2).
According to this feature, the predetermined power source for operating the first conversion circuit that converts the first control signal input from the first signal line into the first drive signal includes the noise removal circuit of the first signal line and the fourth signal line. In the configuration connected to the pull-up circuit of the signal line, it is difficult to stop the supply of the predetermined power by inputting the predetermined power through a plurality of wirings. 2 It is possible to prevent the electric component from operating unintentionally.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention can be modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. include.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is a gaming machine. The number of loaned balls encapsulated inside and circulated in response to a player's lending request and the number of award balls awarded in response to winnings are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines that are stored. In these enclosed game machines, not the game ball but points and points are given to the player, so these points and points assigned correspond to the game value.

  In the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is applied as an example of the game medium. However, the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. However, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving a variation display result to a variation display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified, and according to the variation display result derived to the variation display device. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which a winning can be generated.

  The variable display of the identification information (special drawing, effect design, general drawing, etc.) includes that the identification information blinks. For example, in the special figure, a pattern in which all the segments are turned off and one pattern in which at least some of the segments are turned on (for example, a lost pattern) are alternately included in the variable display. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed by the variable display may be a different symbol from the special symbol that is displayed before the stop display (during change) (the same applies to the effect symbol and the normal symbol).

  The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine or a slot machine that encloses a game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition within a range not departing from the gist of the present invention.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown in the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed this time are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the following descriptions, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games, and a specific electronic component (for example, connector) having a metal fixing part (for example, metal fixing part 651). ) Is mounted, and has a substrate (for example, LED substrate 275) on which a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each electronic component to be mounted is formed,
A component fixing portion (for example, a fixing pad P) for fixing the metal fixing portion with a low-temperature molten metal (for example, solder) is formed on the substrate, and the component fixing portion has the wiring pattern ( For example, a predetermined effect means that is electrically connected to any one of the GND patterns) and that can execute a series of predetermined effects (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control that can execute a series of battle effects), the predetermined effects. A suggestion effect means capable of displaying a plurality of suggestion images during execution of the game and performing a suggestion effect suggesting an advantageous degree advantageous to the player (for example, displaying a plurality of hit telop images during execution of the battle effect) And the effect control CPU 120 that can execute the effect during the battle suggesting the big hit reliability, etc., and the suggested degree of advantage differs depending on the type of the suggested image (for example, life Depending on the type of telop image, the suggested jackpot reliability may be different, and a plurality of different types of suggestion images can be displayed at positions where they can be superimposed on each other (for example, a plurality of hit types having different types The telop images can be displayed at positions where they can overlap each other), and the first suggestion image and the second suggestion image having a higher degree of advantage suggested than the first suggestion image are displayed at positions where they can overlap each other. The second suggestion image is preferentially displayed over the first suggestion image (for example, the big hit than the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” And the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!”) When the high-reliability “GREAT!” Hit telop image 63SHTC is displayed at a position where it can overlap with each other, the “HIT!” Hit telop image 63SHT On the front side than the, it displays a duplicate hit for telop image 63SHTC of "GREAT !!", etc.). A game machine is mentioned.
According to this feature, since the component fixing portion can be formed as a part of the wiring pattern, it is not necessary to provide the component fixing portion separately from the wiring pattern, so that the wiring pattern can be secured while securing the area of the fixing portion. Can be provided satisfactorily. In addition, during the execution of a series of predetermined effects, a plurality of suggested images can be displayed, and an suggested effect that suggests an advantageous degree that is advantageous to the player can be executed. However, it is possible to improve the interest more. In addition, according to such a configuration, a plurality of different suggestion images can be displayed at positions where they can be superimposed on each other, and the first suggestion image and the first suggestion having a higher degree of advantage than the first suggestion image are displayed. When the second suggestion image is displayed at a position where the two suggestion images can be superimposed on each other, the second suggestion image is preferentially displayed over the first suggestion image, and therefore, the second suggestion has a higher degree of advantage suggested than the first suggestion image. The visibility of the image can be prevented from being hindered, the impression of the second suggestion image is increased, and a more effective suggestion effect can be obtained.

  As described above, by combining the wiring pattern and the effect, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of providing an effect that improves the interest of the player while providing a good wiring pattern. In addition, since the wiring pattern can be provided satisfactorily, it is possible to prevent a malfunction of the gaming machine.

  In the above-described embodiment, a specific electronic component having a metal fixing portion is mounted, a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each electronic component to be mounted is formed, and the metal fixing portion is fixed with a low-temperature molten metal. The component fixing portion is formed, and the LED fixing substrate 275 is exemplified as the substrate that is electrically connected to any of the wiring patterns. However, the effect control CPU 120 that constitutes the predetermined effect means and the suggestion effect means. Etc., and the control board for controlling the image display device 5 for displaying the suggestion image, the board configuration (the part fixing part for fixing the metal fixing part to the board with the low-temperature molten metal is provided. A board configuration in which the component fixing portion is formed and electrically connected to one of the wiring patterns may be employed. In this way, the component control unit 12 controls the effect control board 12 on which the effect control CPU 120 and the like constituting the predetermined effect means and the suggestion effect means are mounted, and the control board that controls the image display device 5 that displays the suggestion image. While ensuring the area, it is possible to provide a substrate on which a wiring pattern can be satisfactorily provided.

  Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can improve the interest, the gaming machine is capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), and a predetermined effect means capable of executing a series of predetermined effects. (For example, CPU 120 for effect control capable of executing a series of battle effects, etc.), during the execution of the predetermined effect, a plurality of suggestion images can be displayed to suggest a suggestion effect that is advantageous to the player A suggestive presentation means (for example, a presentation control CPU 120 capable of executing a mid-battle presentation in which a plurality of hit telop images are displayed and a big hit reliability is suggested during execution of the battle presentation). Depending on the type, the suggested degree of advantage varies (for example, the suggested jackpot reliability varies depending on the type of the hit telop image), and a plurality of the different types of suggestions The images can be displayed at positions where they can be superimposed on each other (for example, a plurality of hit telop images of different types can be displayed at positions where they can overlap each other), the first suggestion image, and the first suggestion image When the second suggestion image having a greater degree of advantage suggested than the first suggestion image is displayed at a position where the second suggestion image can be superimposed on each other, the second suggestion image is displayed with priority over the first suggestion image (for example, “HIT! When the hit telop image 63SHTC of “HIT!” And the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT!” Having a higher hit reliability than the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Are displayed at positions that can overlap each other, For example, the “GREAT!” Hit telop image 63SHTC is displayed in front of the “HIT!” Hit telop image 63SHTB. A game machine is mentioned. Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 47 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (to the right of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 47), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 48). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by moving the movable wing piece to the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second starting point). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 47, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 48). Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 47). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating “0” to “9”, lighting patterns such as “−”, and the like. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 47) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 48).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 48).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes an elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds), and a timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the grand prize opening is in an open state is called a round (round game). In the big hit gaming state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or twice).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the upper open limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on them Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the “small hit” may be provided with the small hit type.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state or the probability change state continues until any one end condition such as that a predetermined number of special game has been executed and the next big hit game state has been established. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which the time reduction control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time reduction control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy and high-base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy and high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy and low-base state, and the like. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also referred to as a high accuracy low base state.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special figure game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, and the operation of the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probability big hit”, which is controlled to a probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state, the probable change state is entered. In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability variation big hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. You may make it perform a pseudo-continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 48 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating operation contents as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The sound control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power failure to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 50 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrence of jackpot) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on “per figure” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure display number is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display device 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 50 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold memory number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the start winning set thus transmitted is, for example, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. The special game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic variable time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as presence / absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production, etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the time elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the gaming state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability variation state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the open winning opening based on the fact that the display result is “hit” It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, whereas when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the special figure process flag value is updated. The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for making various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing is ended.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 52 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S 71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed on the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 52 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold memory number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has been received from the main board 11. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. It is updated to 7 ″, and the big hit effect processing is finished.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but a computer device or the like in advance. It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation regarding the feature 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 54 (A), in this embodiment, the non-reach losing variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode and the display result is “lost”. The display result is “big hit”, such as reach-losing variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., in which the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode and the display result is “lost”. Fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), in this embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the reach effect is controlled. As shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 54B, the reliability when each reach is executed (big hit reliability) is normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B. <Higher in the order of Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is executed via normal reach. Further, during the reach production of the super reach, the development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. Variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like, such as variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 shown in FIG. 54A, are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. In FIG. 54A, a variation pattern in which the reliability is developed to a superreach level one level is shown, but a variation pattern in which the reliability is developed in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach with the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 54B, the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability in the super reach is notified of the reach title only by display, and the title of the other super reach is notified by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than the reach with low reliability. Thereby, a player's expectation can be effectively spoken, and the production effect is improved. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the fonts of the title characters (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typefaces (lines, fonts, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the reach title (title notification) is not limited to indicating the title itself, such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing effect control process processing based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 55 and FIG. 56 are diagrams showing an example of the operation effect of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 55 (A) shows that variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. . Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the decorative symbols indicating the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” are stopped and a reach mode is obtained. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of super reach A, as shown in FIG. 55C, the character 31AK001, which is a teammate character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the start of super reach production, such as when the introduction of super reach production (also referred to as super reach production) ends, the entire screen of image display device 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. The super reach A title 31AK002 (here “SP reach A” characters) is displayed, and the speaker 8 outputs the sound corresponding to the reach title name (here “super reach A”). The title of Super Reach A is notified. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 55 (E), the character 31AK003 which is an enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 are confronted. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which characters confront each other is also called a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a teammate character wins, the game is a big hit, and if a teammate character loses, the game is lost.

  In addition, when displaying a line on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, a sound corresponding to the line may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the line is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 55 (E), and may be displayed as subtitles on the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 55C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction of the super reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 55 (F), the title 31AK005 (here) Is displayed, and the audio corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “super reach B”) is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach B. The Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 55 (G), the character 31AK006, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 are confronted. The subsequent part of the reach production of Super Reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach production. By doing in this way, since the title can be notified after showing the introduction portion of the super reach effect to the player, etc., the effect effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, in Super Reach A (FIG. 55 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And Super Reach B (FIG. 55 (C) → (F) → (G). In the introduction part until it is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 55 (C)). By doing in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach is made after the super reach production is started and which title is notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to making the production mode until the title is notified completely common, and it is possible to determine which super-reach is to be determined if the production is closely watched. You may make it make a part into a common production | presentation aspect. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing in this way, the production effect is improved and the player pays attention to the production. As described above, the title notification may be executed after it is possible to specify which super reach is to be made.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of super reach D, as shown in FIG. 55 (H), the super reach D title 31AK007 (here, the letters “SP reach D”) is displayed at a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, a sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “defeat the enemy”) is output from the speaker 8, thereby informing the title of the super reach D. Thus, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 indicating the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. Here, the expectation degree is an expectation degree that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely coincide with the reach big hit reliability.

  Note that the super-reach D audio notification does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the voice title notification is varied depending on the type of reach. Thereby, the notification mode of a title alert | report becomes various and an interest improves.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation level suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing in this way, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during reach production. In FIG. 55 (I), the contents of effects common to FIG. 55 (C) (super reach A and super reach B) are shown, but a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (J), the enemy character 31AK009 is displayed, the line 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted is executed. The

(Super Reach E)
In the case of super reach E, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), the super reach E title 31AK010 (here, the letters “SP reach E”) is displayed on the upper left part of the image display device 5. Thus, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach E where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Executed. Thus, in the super reach E, the title is notified together with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during reach production.

  In the reach production of Super Reach E with a low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent giving a player an excessive sense of expectation by performing the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 55 (D), (F), ( H)). By doing in this way, the title notification according to the super reach production can be executed and the production effect is improved. Note that the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach in super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high hit reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of the super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach with low jackpot reliability. In E, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production, but the title is notified at the start of the super reach production when the reach is high and the super reach when the reach is low. The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
In this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In particular, in the case of a reach with high hit reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. Things (title announcement using the entire screen) or the like may be used. In addition, the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, and the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high hit reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, in the case where the display area for performing the title notification is varied according to the reach effect, the display area may be varied as in this embodiment, or the display location may be varied.

(Expectation indication)
In this embodiment, in the supervision A and superreach B title announcements with high jackpot reliability, the superleach D having a lower jackpot reliability than superreach A and superreach B without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification, the expectation suggestion display is displayed. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an effect becomes dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower hit reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from losing a sense of expectation by displaying an expectation indication indicating that the reliability is low in a reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation indication may be displayed in at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  Note that the expected level suggestion display is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. 55 (H) or the like, and the expected level may be suggested by a meter or gauge, and the expected level is supported. The numerical values may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 55H and the like, in the case where the number of black stars is indicated, the number of stages of expectation may be increased so that half black (half) black stars can be displayed.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and a super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in super reach A and super reach B, attention can be paid to reach production. In Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a decision effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the kind of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. In addition, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. Note that the display end timing of the title can be changed arbitrarily since any effect can be achieved.

  In addition, although the production operation of the reach effect of Super Reach C is omitted here, for example, title notification or expectation suggestion display corresponding to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when it is time to derive the display result (the final stage of variable display), a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “lost”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), a decision effect is displayed in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5. Thereafter, if the display result is “big hit”, an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 56C, and a big hit combination is obtained as shown in FIG. 56D. A definitive decorative symbol is derived. If the display result is “losing”, an image indicating that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the determined effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and a well-defined title notification can be executed.

  In the example of the production operation shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, during the reach production of the super reach, the variable design is executed by reducing the decorative design in the lower right part of the image display device 5, but the reach production is being performed. The method of displaying the decorative pattern may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach effect.

  In addition, when displaying on-screen display, active display, character resident display during variable display, and mobile-related display, the image display device 5 is appropriately hidden during the super-reach reach effect in order to focus on the reach effect. It is good. At this time, during the low-reliability reach production such as Super Reach E, these displays may be kept displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting excessively due to the low-reliability reach effect, and it is possible to focus attention on the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development production)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 57A, when the development effect is executed when the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in the drawing, an effect that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Thereafter, in the case of developing to super reach A, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), the title of super reach A is notified and the reach effect of super reach A is executed. In the case of developing to super reach B, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), the title of super reach B is notified and the reach effect of super reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 57, when the development reach is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 57B, and may be an effect that the screen gradually cracks and breaks, or displays a sandstorm (display that appears to have failed). You may do it. By making such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. In addition, there may be a development effect of gasses, such as an effect that the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 55 (H), a black star indicating the degree of expectation is displayed from the beginning in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008. You may make it perform the expectation degree suggestion production which suggests an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), when notifying the title of Super Reach D, first, the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 58 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed. A performance that fits into one of the white stars is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 58D and 58E, the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of reach expectation. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (every number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the degree-of-expectation suggestion display 31AK021, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), the black star is highlighted. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 58A to 58F, the black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion display is increased by one level, but there are two or more black stars. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation increases by two or more levels. Alternatively, half of the black stars may be displayed and the expectation level may be increased by half. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of stars to be displayed (the number of steps of the expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing in this way, expectation suggestion production becomes various and production effect improves. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectation that increase at a time, fits into the white stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expected increase Such an effect may be executed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, character, motif, sound output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changeable by the player's operation.

  58 (G) to 58 (L) are presentation operation examples of title notification and expectation suggestion presentation when the normal mode and special mode are provided as the presentation mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 58 (A) to 58 (F), a title notification and an expectation suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, audio corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but audio different from the normal mode (for example, audio having a different voice color) is output. In addition, the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 58 (I), the black rhombus 31AK025 moves and the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed. An effect that fits in one of the white diamonds is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 58 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of reach expectation. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 58 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted. In this way, depending on the presentation mode (the state when the reach presentation is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the gaming state, etc., the presentation can be varied and the presentation effect can be varied by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

  FIG. 58 shows an example of the effect operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation suggestion effect) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). (Including) may be different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is notified or the execution rate of the title notification may be varied. For example, when a predetermined production mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, the production according to the player's preference can be executed and the production effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that increases the number of black stars stepwise is executed. An expectation suggestion effect that reduces the number of displays suggesting stepwise may be executed. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of performing the expectation suggestion effect that increases the display indicating the expectation level of the expectation level suggestion step by step, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation level. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at a time instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, a button is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 59 (B). The development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when an operation on the push button 31B is detected, the super reach C title 31AK032 (here, the letters “SP reach C”) is displayed as shown in FIG. The title of reach C is notified. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by 2 or more, it is displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title or the degree of expectation indication changes may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the reliability of a big hit is executed according to a notification mode of a title (for example, a display color of a title). For example, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the Super Reach A title 31AK036 is displayed in black, and the audio corresponding to the Reach title name is output from the speaker 8, so that the Super Reach A title is notified. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. Thus, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title preview shown in FIG. 60, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the title display.

  In addition, when a title notice that changes the display mode (display color) of the title is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. Moreover, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Title notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title being reached is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that improves the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit advantageous state, such as the notice effect or the development effect. In this way, once the title is notified, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not a notice effect is executed and an effect aspect. The notice effect determining process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. In the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001).

  If the change pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 31 AKS 001; Yes), the display color of the super reach title (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31 AKS 002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 62A according to whether the display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As shown in FIG. 62A, the display color of the Super Reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and from “black” to “fruit pattern”. The thing which changes from "red" to "fruit pattern" is provided, and the big hit reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of a title, and a production effect improves.

  Note that the “fruit pattern” may be such that the title character is displayed in bold and the character itself is “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area is “fruit pattern”. . There may be a pattern displayed as “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 60, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes. In addition, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach with a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine any of the changing timings. In the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of timings to be changed may be one or less than that of a super reach with a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the production mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 62A in the normal mode, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. Determine the display color of the title at a different rate. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode of the title notice (display color and display color change timing) depending on the effect mode, the effects become more diverse and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, a serif notice that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed as the notice effect according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the words) of the characters in the reach effect of the super reach.

  After determining the display color of the super-reach title, the display color of the character's speech in the super-reach reach effect (whether or not to execute the speech advance notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the lines in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 62C according to whether the display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As shown in FIG. 62 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach production are changed from “white”, “red”, “white” to “red”, and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the lines. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of words, and the production effect improves. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the line is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the line notice. For example, when the same notice mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the line notice, the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same notice form is obtained. Also, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode of the title notice and the line notice. For example, the big hit reliability may be higher when the change timing is the same than when the change timing is different, or the big hit reliability may be different depending on which change is first. In this way, it is possible to focus attention on the change timings of the title notice and the line notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the lines may be determined in a ratio different from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  In addition, it may replace with serif notice and may be made to perform the notice effect which notifies a big hit reliability by the change of the effect aspect of reach production. In that case, in the notice effect, a plurality of effect mode change timings may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After determining the display color of the line in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the change pattern is not a super reach variation pattern (step AK31S001; No), the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). Thereafter, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the title notice and the serif notice can be executed in the case of super reach. However, in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the super-reliable super reach), the title notice is provided. And at least one of the serif notices may be made executable. Further, although the title notice and the line notice have been described as being determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 62, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may be varied depending on the type of super reach. By doing in this way, the notice effect according to the kind of reach can be performed, and the production effect improves.

  In this embodiment, the number of performance modes that can be executed (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the line notice. By doing in this way, the production becomes various and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the serif notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing in this way, a unified notice effect can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
An effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed when the effect mode of the title notice and the line notice change. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an action effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. And after an effect production | presentation is performed, you may make it a production | presentation aspect (display color) of a title or a line change. The effect mode (action effect image or the like) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the speech. There may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the line does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results relating to the title notice and the line notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, according to the effect mode of the action effect, the rate at which at least one effect mode of the title notice and the serif notice changes (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different. The rate of change in which direction of appearance changes (the rate of which acts) may be different, and the rate of change in what color (how many steps) may be changed. . By executing such an action effect, the player will pay attention to which of the title and the line will act when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there exist several production | presentation modes, you may make it determine the presence or absence of execution of an effect production, and the production | presentation aspect in a different ratio according to production modes. By doing in this way, the effect production according to production mode can be performed and production effect improves.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either a title or a line depending on the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the effect of the character or the effect content in the battle effect) May be changed. By doing in this way, the player comes to pay attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-described characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiment are not essential components and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3. Here, although expressed as a sub liquid crystal, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E in the above embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed even after the notification of the title, the title and the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the title is notified on the image display device 5, the title or the degree of expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing in this way, a title and an expectation suggestion display which can display a title and an expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach production in the image display device 5 are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described. However, the present invention is applied to the title notification (notice that mainly displays characters) related to other effects. May be. For example, in the case of executing a pre-read zone effect in which the background image or the effect mode in the image display device 5 is shifted to a plurality of different zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) as the notice effect (for example, the pre-read notice effect), the transitioned zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When presenting a mission (such as “Let's reach 7”, “Defeat all enemies using a stick controller”) and performing a mission effect that will be advantageous to the player when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for informing whether or not the display result is “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is shown ( 56 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, when the predetermined timing before the display result is derived, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation effective period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing in this way, since a display result is shown according to a player's operation, a player's willingness to participate in a game can be raised and interest is improved.

  63 and 64 are diagrams showing an example of super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 63 (A), after reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), a character 31AK041 that is a friendly character and a character 31AK042 that is an enemy character are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 63 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 64 (G) to (I), a reach effect is performed in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 63C, a small button image 31AK043 and a restriction line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. Thereby, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is executed are prepared. The big hit reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable aspect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 63D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 63E, the praying character 31AK045 is changed to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is changed to the large button image 31AK047. To change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 64 (I), the effect 31AK049 in which the bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 to be displayed is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to a stick image 31AK051.

  Thus, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, an effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. Note that the operation effect image may change without an action effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may vary depending on the type of action effect.

  Thereafter, before a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the restriction line 31AK044 is deleted as shown in FIG. 64 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 64 (K). A display prompting the user to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, an operation effective period in which the operation to the stick controller 31A is effective.

  When an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (M), a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived at the timing when the variation time ends. If no operation is detected within a predetermined operation effective period, an image shown in FIG. 64 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect image, and when the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of the small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation effect image with high reliability during reach production, so the production effect is improved and the player's expectation is also improved. Can be maintained.

  63 and 64, the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted, but in parallel with the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. It may be executed. The determination related to the operation effect or the operation effect image (the presence / absence of the operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence / absence of the action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which suggests the expectation degree of control to advantageous states, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, the effect of covering the screen with the shutter display after the variable display is started is executed. In the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. There are cases where a specific image is included and displayed when any one of the shutter display and the reach title display is displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image having a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The multiple types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the display size difference between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display.

  When a shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image not including the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the big hit reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the big hit reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red letter reach title). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When a fruit pattern is displayed during shutter display and reach title display, a notification of outputting a common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 and a notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. By the light emission control of the common sound and game effect lamp 9, the player is shown that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such shutter display and reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 65 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 65A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed, and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, variable display of decorative symbols is started as shown in FIG. A downward arrow indicates variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), the super reach effect is started. For example, the variable display is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the screen and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed on the lower right of the screen, and the contents of super reach to be executed from now on are shown as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, in the reach title image 31AK062, characters “battle reach” indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the big hit reliability is high, such as “Atsuiatsui”. Here, the size of the suggestion display displayed in the reach title effect is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting a specific sound, it can be made easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image has been displayed. In addition, although the case where the output period of the common sound and the specific sound is completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 65 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters “Battle Victory!” Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is informed that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen with the original number design. As shown in FIG. 65 (f), all symbols are stopped and a big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 65A and 65D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that a fruit pattern image having a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  Also, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 65A is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noted.

  Also, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 65 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 65 (d) are displayed at different timings. If it does in this way, it can prevent that the fruit pattern image which is a specific image becomes difficult to see by the execution timing overlapping.

  The determination relating to the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 in FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, a fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily performed. Further, the determination relating to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 61 together with the determination relating to the shutter effect.

(Additional notes regarding the feature 31AK)
(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player. The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that the state is controlled, and the title notification means (for example, the effect) capable of notifying the title corresponding to the suggestion effect CPU 120 for control), and the title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 55D and 55F). ).

  According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

  (2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the suggestion effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effects, and in the plurality of types of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period. May be executed in a common manner (for example, FIG. 55C).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which suggestion effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), at a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestion effect, a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state. Execution is possible, and the execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.

  According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

  (4) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), the suggestion effect executing means includes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach A or Super Reach B) and the first as the suggestion effect. 2 suggestion effects (for example, the reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) can be executed, and the title notification means is the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect in the second suggestion effect. You may make it alert | report the title corresponding to.

  According to such a structure, since the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, the effect of the effect is improved.

  (5) In the gaming machine of the above (4), when the second suggestion effect is executed, the ratio of controlling to the advantageous state is higher when the first suggestion effect is executed. Also good.

  According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

  (6) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (5), the suggestion effect execution means is configured to be able to execute the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified during the predetermined period. May be.

  According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

  (7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6), detection means (for example, stick controller 31A and push button 31B) capable of detecting the player's action and a specific display corresponding to the detection means ( For example, specific display execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that performs a small button image 31AK043, a large button image 31AK047, and a stick image 31AK051) is further provided, and the specific display execution means uses a first specific display as the specific display. (For example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that is more advantageous for the player than the first specific display can be displayed and detected by the detection means In the non-valid period, after displaying the first specific indication One specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 63 (E) and 64 (I)), and an operation effect using the changed second specific display in the effective period of detection by the detecting means. May be executed (for example, FIGS. 64J and 64K).

  According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

  (8) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (7), a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size as a suggestion display that suggests an expectation degree of control to the advantageous state (FIG. 65). The first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in (a) and the second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (the display at the time of the reach title shown in FIG. 65D). Display means (for example, the image display device 5 and the CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a two-size reach title image 31AK062, etc., and the display means includes a plurality of types of elements (FIG. 65 (a)) having different modes. , (D) element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc.) An image (such as the fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 65A and 65D) can be displayed, and when displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image. , A plurality of types of elements are displayed so as to be included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display (in either the shutter image 31AK061 or the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (d)). May be displayed so as to include the elements E1 to E5).

  According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that the specific image is displayed.

(Explanation regarding the feature 63SH)
Next, the characteristic part 63SH of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 63SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and a predetermined effect means capable of executing a series of predetermined effects and a plurality of suggested images displayed during execution of the predetermined effects. Suggesting effect means capable of executing an suggestive effect that suggests an advantageous degree that is advantageous to a person, and depending on the type of the suggested image, a plurality of suggested images having different suggested degrees and different types are superimposed on each other. When the first suggestion image and the second suggestion image having a higher degree of advantage suggested than the first suggestion image are displayed at positions where they can be superimposed on each other, the first suggestion image is displayed. Is a gaming machine characterized in that the second suggestion image is preferentially displayed.

  In connection with the feature section 63SH, an embodiment in which the production control CPU 120 executes a series of battle productions in which a battle with a monster is executed as the super reach B reach production will be described.

(A series of battle production)
FIG. 66A is a diagram for explaining a series of battle effects. The series of battle effects include a pre-battle effect that corresponds to a scene in which a monster appears, a mid-battle effect that corresponds to a scene in which a battle with the monster is performed, and a post-battle effect that corresponds to a scene after the battle with the monster. In this way, a series of battle effects are effects that continuously execute related effects such as a pre-battle effect, a mid-battle effect, and a post-battle effect. The series of battle effects is an example of “a series of predetermined effects” in the present invention.

  FIG. 66A is a diagram for explaining a series of battle effects. The effect control CPU 120 executes a different post-battle effect according to the variation pattern. For example, when the display result is the variation pattern PB2-5 that does not develop into super reach A and the display result is “big hit”, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect of winning the monster as an effect after the battle. According to such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to recognize that the display result is “big hit” by performing an effect of winning the monster as a post-battle effect. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-5 in which the display result is “losing” without developing to super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect defeated by the monster as an effect after the battle. According to such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to recognize that the display result is “lost” by performing an effect of defeating the monster as a post-battle effect. Moreover, when it is the fluctuation pattern PA3-4 or the fluctuation pattern PB3-4 that develops to Super Reach A, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect that the monster escapes as an effect after the battle. According to such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to recognize that the monster escapes as a post-battle effect, and that the game will develop into Super Reach A.

  In contrast, the effect control CPU 120 executes the same pre-battle effect regardless of the variation pattern. According to such a configuration, even if the pre-battle presentation is executed, the player does not recognize whether the display result is “big hit”, the display result is “losing”, or the game is developed to Super Reach A. Can be.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays a plurality of hit telop images as the effect during the battle, and depending on the effect mode, the big hit reliability that the display result is “big hit”, and the development trust that develops into the super reach A. An effect that suggests the degree is executed. The player can continuously perform the operation on the push button 31B during the execution period of the effect during the battle. The effect control CPU 120 displays one of the hit telop images among the multiple types of hit telop images each time an operation to the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B. The effect during the battle is an example of the “suggest effect” in the present invention. The hit telop image is an example of the “suggested image” in the present invention. The jackpot reliability and the development reliability are examples of the “degree of advantage that is advantageous to the player” in the present invention. The operation on the push button 31B is an example of the “player action” in the present invention. The push sensor 35B is an example of the “detecting means” in the present invention.

(Accuracy telop image)
Here, the telop image is an image in which a character string that allows the player to infer the jackpot reliability and the development reliability is displayed. In the hit telop image, a character string indicating whether the attack on the monster has been hit or the amount of damage to the monster is displayed as a character string that the player can guess the jackpot reliability and the development reliability. ing.

  FIG. 66B is a diagram of an example of the hit telop image. The effect control CPU 120 displays a hit telop image 63SHTA in which a character string “MISS” shown in FIG. 66-2 (A) is displayed as a hit telop image, and “HIT” shown in FIG. 66-2 (B). "!", A hit telop image 63SHTB displaying a character string "!", A hit telop image 63SHTC displaying a character string "GREAT !!" shown in FIG. 66-2 (C), and FIG. 66-2. It is possible to display the hit telop image 63SHTD on which the character string “EXCELLENT !!!” shown in (D) is displayed.

  The character string “MISS” is a character string indicating that the attack on the monster did not hit. Accordingly, when the “MISS” hit telop image 63SHTA is displayed, the player can infer that the jackpot reliability and the development reliability are low.

  The character string “HIT!” Is a character string indicating that an attack on the monster has been hit, but the damage to the monster is small, and it is better than the character string “MISS” if judged in light of social conventions. It can be understood that there is. Therefore, when the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Is displayed, the player has a higher jackpot reliability and development reliability than when the “MISS” hit telop image 63SHTA is displayed. Can be inferred.

  The character string “GREAT !!” is a character string indicating that an attack on the monster is hit and the damage to the monster is large. If judged according to common sense, it is better than the character string “HIT!”. Can be understood as meaning. Therefore, when the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT!” Is displayed, the player analogizes that the hit hit reliability is higher than when the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Is displayed. Is possible.

  The character string “EXCELLENT !!!” is a character string that indicates that the attack on the monster has been hit and the damage to the monster is large. From the character string “GREAT !!!!” Can also be understood as a good meaning. Therefore, when the hit telop image 63SHTD of “EXCELLENT !!!!” is displayed, the player is more likely to have a big hit reliability than when the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!!” is displayed. Can be inferred.

  Note that the size of the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Is larger than the size of the hit telop image 63SHTA of “MISS”. Further, the size of the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!!!” is larger than the size of the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!”. In addition, the size of the hit telop image 63SHTD of “EXCELLENT !!!!” is larger than the size of the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!!”. According to such a configuration, even for a player who cannot understand the meaning of the character string even if judged in light of social conventions, the big hit reliability, the development reliability, depending on the size of the hit telop image Can be inferred by the player.

(Erase production)
In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the hit telop image, the effect control CPU 120 executes an erase effect for deleting the hit telop image.

  FIG. 66-3 is a diagram of an example of the effect operation of the erase effect. When a predetermined time elapses after displaying the hit telop image, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hit telop image as an erasure effect as shown in FIGS. 66-3 (A) → (B) → (C). Animated display that gradually reduces the size of the. The animation display in which the size of the hit telop image is gradually reduced is an example of “changing the mode of the suggestion image” in the present invention. According to such a configuration, if the size of the hit telop image is gradually reduced, the player can be made aware that the hit telop image will be deleted soon.

(Direction accompanying the display of the hit telop image)
In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs the “MISS” hit telop image 63 SHTA, the “HIT!” Hit telop image 63 SHTB, and the “GREAT! , Four types of hit telop images, such as “EXCELLENT !!!!” hit telop image 63SHTD, can be displayed.

  In addition, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes an erase effect for erasing the hit telop image when a predetermined time has elapsed after displaying the hit telop image. Depending on the type, the display period until the hit telop image is erased differs. Here, the display period until the hit telop image is erased means that, after the hit telop image is displayed, an erasing effect for erasing the hit telop image is executed, so that FIG. As shown in 3 (D), this is a period until the hit telop image is deleted.

  FIG. 66-4 is a diagram for explaining the effects accompanying the display of the hit telop image. As shown in FIG. 66-4, the display period of the hit telop image is 200 ms for the hit telop image 63 SHTA for “MISS”, 400 ms for the hit telop image 63 SHTB for “HIT!”, And the hit for “GREAT !!”. The telop image 63SHTC is 600 ms, and the hit telop image 63SHTD of “EXCELLENT !!!” is 800 ms. According to such a configuration, the player can analogize the jackpot reliability and the development reliability by the length of the display period until the hit telop image is deleted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 66-4, after the hit telop image is displayed, the timing for starting the erasing effect of the hit telop image is 100 ms after the hit telop image 63SHTA of “MISS”. The hit telop image 63SHTB of "HIT!" Is 300 ms later, the hit telop image 63SHTC of "GREAT !!!!" is 500 ms later, and the hit telop image 63SHTD of "EXCELLENT !!!!" is 700 ms later. According to such a configuration, after the hit telop image is displayed, the length of the display period from when the hit telop image starts to be reduced as the erasing effect of the hit telop image starts. Therefore, the player can infer the jackpot reliability and the development reliability. In addition, in any type of hit telop image erasing effect, the erasing effect execution period is 100 ms, so that it is not necessary to pay attention to what aspect the erasing effect is. When a plurality of hit telop images are displayed, attention to a hit telop image that has not yet been erased can be increased more than a hit telop image that has already been erased. it can.

  In addition, when displaying the hit telop image on the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect of displaying an effect image showing a state in which the attack on the monster hits and the body fluid of the monster spouts out. There is. The effect displaying the effect image is an example of the “specific effect” in the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 66-4, the effect control CPU 120 displays the “effect image A” when displaying the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!”, And the hit telop image of “GREAT !!”. When 63SHTC is displayed, “effect image B” is displayed, and when “EXCELLENT !!!!” hit telop image 63SHTD is displayed, “effect image C” is displayed. For example, the “effect image B” is an image that attracts the player's attention more than the “effect image A”, such as an image showing a state in which a larger amount of body fluid is ejected than the “effect image A”. Further, the “effect image C” is an image that attracts the player's attention more than the “effect image B”, such as an image showing a state in which a larger amount of body fluid is ejected than the “effect image B”. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the effect image when the “MISS” hit telop image 63 SHTA is displayed. According to such a configuration, the effect during the battle can be further increased. In addition, the player can infer the jackpot reliability and the development reliability depending on the presence / absence and the form of the effect image when the hit telop image is displayed.

  Further, when displaying the hit telop image, the effect control CPU 120 may execute an effect of outputting a sound effect indicating that the attack to the monster has been hit by the speaker 8. The effect that outputs the sound effect is an example of the “specific effect” in the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 66-4, the effect control CPU 120 outputs “sound effect A” when displaying the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” And the hit telop image of “GREAT !!”. “Sound effect B” is output when displaying 63SHTC, and “sound effect C” is output when displaying the hit telop image 63SHTD of “EXCELLENT !!!!”. For example, the “sound effect B” is a sound that attracts the player's attention more than the “sound effect A”, such as a sound larger than the “sound effect A”, a flashy sound, a low sound, or a sound with long reverberation. It is. In addition, the “sound effect C” is a sound that attracts the player's attention more than the “sound effect A”, such as a sound larger than the “sound effect B”, a flashy sound, a low sound, or a sound with long reverberation. It is. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 does not output the sound effect when displaying the “MISS” hit telop image 63 SHTA. According to such a configuration, the effect during the battle can be further increased. Also, the player can analogize the jackpot reliability and the development reliability depending on the presence / absence and mode of the sound effect when the hit telop image is displayed.

(Direction processing during battle)
FIG. 66-5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect process during battle for determining the effect mode of the effect during battle and executing the effect during battle. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during battle within the effect processing during variable display in step S172 in the effect control process shown in FIG.

  In the effect processing during battle, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether it is an effect period during battle for executing the effect during battle (step 63SHS1). The effect period during battle may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in the effect control process shown in FIG. 53, for example.

  When it is determined in the process of step 63SHS1 that the production period is during the battle (step 63SHS1; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the operation on the push button 31B is an effective operation valid period (step 63SHS2). ). For example, the operation valid period may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process in step S171 in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the process of step 63SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 first sets the condition between the case where a predetermined period as the operation effective period has passed and the case where the number of times detected as an effective operation has reached a predetermined number. With the achievement, it is determined that the operation valid period has ended.

  Here, in this Embodiment, the determination whether it is a production period during a battle and the determination whether it is an operation effective period are performed separately. According to such a configuration, for example, when a part of the period during the battle effect period is the operation effective period, or when the intermittent period in the battle effect period is the operation effective period, Even in the case where the operation valid period does not completely match, it is possible to suitably detect an effective operation in the effect during the battle. When the effect period during battle and the operation effective period completely match, either one of the process in step 63SHS1 and the process in step 63SHS2 can be omitted.

  When it is determined in the process of step 63SHS2 that the operation is valid (step 63SHS2; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether an operation on the push button 31B is detected (step 63SHS3). In the process of step 63SHS3, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether an operation on the push button 31B is detected based on the presence or absence of a detection signal from the push sensor 35B.

  When it is determined in step 63SHS3 that an operation on the push button 31B is detected (step 63SHS3; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the detected operation is an effective operation (step 63SHS4). . Here, the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined number of operations as an effective operation. In the present embodiment, effect control CPU 120 determines that the detected operation is an effective operation if the detected operation is the 40th operation or less in the operation effective period.

  When it is determined that the operation is an effective operation in the process of step 63SHS4 (step 63SHS4; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines which of the multiple types of hit telop images to display. Determine (step 63SHS5). In the process of step 63SHS5, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the hit telop image according to how many times the operation determined to be an effective operation is the operation during the operation effective period and the variation pattern. To do.

(Decision rate of the type of hit telop image)
FIG. 66-6 is a diagram illustrating a determination ratio of the type of hit telop image. When the operation determined to be an effective operation is the first to thirteenth operations in the operation effective period, the effect control CPU 120 selects the type of the hit telop image at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 66-6 (A). decide. When the operation determined to be an effective operation is the 14th to 26th operation in the operation effective period, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hit telop image at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 66-6 (B). Determine the type. When the operation determined to be an effective operation is the 27th to 39th operation in the operation effective period, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hit telop image at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 66-6 (C). Determine the type. When the operation determined to be an effective operation is the 40th operation in the operation effective period, the effect control CPU 120 selects the type of hit telop image at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 66-6 (D). decide.

  In the determination ratios shown in FIGS. 66-6 (A) to (C), in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-5 and the fluctuation pattern PA3-4 in which the display result is “lost”, the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” The ratio determined for the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!!!” is lower than the determined ratio, and the ratio “EXCELLENT!” Is determined for the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!!!”. The ratio determined for the hit telop image 63SHTD is lower. On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PB2-5 and the fluctuation pattern PB3-4 in which the display result is “big hit”, the ratio of “GREAT !!” is larger than the ratio determined as the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!”. The ratio determined for the hit telop image 63SHTC is higher, and is determined for the hit telop image 63SHTD of "EXCELLENT !!!!" than the ratio determined for the hit telop image 63SHTC of "GREAT !!!!" The rate is higher.

  According to such a determination ratio, when the hit telop image 63SHTD of “EXCELLENT !!!!” is displayed, the reliability of the big hit is the highest, and then the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!!” is displayed. Is a big hit reliability when the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIS!” Is displayed, and the big hit reliability when the “MISS” hit telop image 63SHTA is displayed is high. The lowest.

  According to such a configuration, the suggested jackpot reliability can be varied according to the type of the hit telop image, and the number of display times of the hit telop image having a higher jackpot reliability in the effect during the battle is increased. It can be suggested that the greater the number, the higher the reliability of the jackpot.

  Also, in the determination ratios shown in FIGS. 66-6 (A) to (C), if the attention is paid to the fluctuation pattern PA2-5 and the fluctuation pattern PA3-4 in which the display result is “losing”, the fluctuation that does not develop into the super reach A. In the case of the variation pattern PA3-4 that develops to Super Reach A, the ratio determined to be a hit telop image other than the “MISS” hit telop image 63SHTA is higher than that of the pattern PA2-5. Further, if attention is paid to the fluctuation pattern PB2-5 and fluctuation pattern PB3-4 in which the display result is “big hit”, the fluctuation pattern that develops to super reach A than the fluctuation pattern PB2-5 that does not develop to super reach A. In the case of PB3-4, the proportion determined to be a hit telop image other than “MISS” hit telop image 63SHTA is higher.

  According to such a configuration, depending on whether the type of the hit telop image is the hit telop image 63SHTA of “MISS”, the suggested development reliability can be made different. It can be suggested that the greater the number of display times of the hit telop images other than the “MISS” hit telop image 63SHTA, the higher the development reliability.

  Also, in the determination ratios shown in FIGS. 66-6 (A) to (C), when the operation is the 14th to the 26th, the “MISS” is hit as compared with the case of the 1st to the 13th operation. The ratio determined as the hit telop image other than the telop image 63SHTA is doubled. Further, in the case of the 27th to 39th operation, the ratio determined as the hit telop image other than the “MISS” hit telop image 63 SHTA is 1 as compared to the case of the 14th to 26th operation. .5 times.

  According to such a configuration, as the number of operations in the battle effect is increased, the frequency of displaying the hit telop image other than the “MISS” hit telop image 63SHTA can be increased, and the display result is The expectation for becoming a “big hit” and developing into Super Reach A can be gradually increased.

  In addition, the determination ratio shown in FIG. 66-7 (D) is determined at a ratio of 100% to the hit telop image 63SHTD of “EXCELLENT !!!”.

  According to such a configuration, the expectation that the display result will be “big hit” and that it will develop into Super Reach A is gradually increasing, according to the 40th operation that is the last effective operation. Thus, since the hit telop image with the highest jackpot reliability is displayed, it is possible to focus attention on the post-battle effect while maintaining a high expectation.

  After performing the process of step 63SHS5, the display control CPU 120 displays the hit telop image at which display position among a plurality of display positions predetermined as display positions at which the hit telop image can be displayed. Is determined (step 63SHS6). In the process of step 63SHS6, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the display position determination random value updated by the random number circuit 124, and refers to the display position determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121. Thus, the display position of the hit telop image is determined.

(Display position that can display telop image for hit)
FIG. 66-7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display position where the hit telop image can be displayed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of display positions at which the hit telop image can be displayed are set corresponding to the display area in which the monster image is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 66-7, a hit telop image corresponding to the display area in which the monster's body is displayed, the display area in which the monster's right wing is displayed, and the display area in which the monster's left wing is displayed. A plurality of display positions capable of displaying are set.

  For example, in the display area where the monster's body is displayed, the coordinates (X1, Y1), (X1, Y2), (X1, Y3),. , Y8), (X5, Y9), and (X5, Y10) 50 display positions are set. Further, in the display area where the right wing of the monster is displayed, the coordinates (X11, Y11), (X11, Y12), (X11, Y13),. , Y15), (X17, Y16), and (X17, Y17) 49 display positions are set. In the display area where the right wing of the monster is displayed, the coordinates (X21, Y21), (X21, Y22), (X21, Y23),. , Y25), (X27, Y26), and 49 display positions (X27, Y27) are set.

  In the display position determination table referred to in the processing of step 63SHS6, a numerical value to be compared with the random number value for display position determination is assigned to one of a plurality of coordinates shown in FIG. 66-7. The effect control CPU 120 determines, as the display position of the hit telop image, the coordinates to which the determination value that matches the display position determination random value is assigned.

  After performing the process of step 63SHS6, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hit telop image on the new layer (step 63SHS7). Here, in the hit telop image, the priority of display is set according to the big hit reliability of the hit telop image, whether the deletion effect is being executed, and the display order.

  For example, the higher the jackpot reliability when the hit telop image is displayed, the higher the priority is set. Therefore, when a plurality of hit telop images of different types are displayed, they may be displayed at positions where they are superimposed on each other. For example, a hit telop image and a hit with higher hit reliability than the hit telop image are displayed. When the telop image for the game overlaps with each other, the telop image for hit with high hit reliability is displayed in front of the hit telop image with low hit reliability.

  Further, for example, the priority of the hit telop image that is not executing the erasing effect is set higher than the priority of the hit telop image that is executing the erasing effect. Therefore, for example, when an erasing effect is executed on a certain hit telop image, the hit telop image having a lower hit reliability than the hit telop image is displayed at the position where the telop image is superimposed. In this case, a hit telop image with a low jackpot reliability is displayed on the front side of the hit telop image with a high jackpot reliability in which the erasing effect is executed.

  Further, for example, in the case of the same type of hit telop image, the priority is set higher as the time elapsed after the hit telop image is displayed is shorter. Therefore, for example, when a certain type of hit telop image is displayed first in time, the same type of hit telop image as the hit telop image is displayed at the position where the hit telop image is superimposed. When displayed later, the hit telop image displayed later is displayed on the front side of the previously displayed hit telop image.

  Note that displaying a hit telop image with a high priority on the front side is an example of “preferentially displaying” in the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the priority of the hit telop image 63SHTD of “EXCELLENT !!!” not executing the erase effect is the highest, and the priority of the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!!” not executing the erase effect is next. The priority of the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” That is not high and then the deletion effect is not being executed is high, and the priority of the “MISS” hit telop image 63SHTA that is not the execution of the deletion effect is high, and then the deletion effect is The priority of the “EXCELLENT !!!!” hit telop image 63 SHTD being executed has a high priority, and then the erasure effect being executed “GREAT !!!” the priority of the hit telop image 63 SHTC is high, and then the deletion effect is executed. " IT! "Hit for the ticker image 63SHTB priority is high of, is the lowest priority of the hit for the ticker image 63SHTA of which is during the execution of the disappearing demonstration" MISS ".

  In the process of step 63SHS7, the effect control CPU 120 generates a new layer for newly displaying the hit telop image in accordance with such display priority setting. For example, when a hit telop image whose display priority is lower than that of a newly displayed hit telop image has already been displayed, the effect control CPU 120 is in front of the layer of the already displayed hit telop image. Create a new layer on the side. Also, for example, when a hit telop image having a higher display priority than the newly displayed hit telop image is already displayed, the effect control CPU 120 uses the layer of the hit telop image already displayed. Also creates a new layer on the back side. Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hit telop image of the type determined in step 63SHS5 at the display position determined in step 63SHS6 in the new layer.

  If it is determined in the process of step 63SHS1 that it is not a battle effect period (step 63SHS1; No), if it is determined in the process of step 63SHS2 that it is not an operation effective period (step 63SHS2; No), the process of step 63SHS3 If it is determined that the operation on the push button 31B has not been detected (step 63SHS3; No), if it is determined that the operation is not an effective operation in the process of step 63SHS4 (step 63SHS4; No), or step 63SHS7 After executing the processing, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a hit telop image to start the erase effect (step 63SHS8). In the process of step 63SHS8, the effect control CPU 120 starts to set the start timing of the erase effect specified according to the type of the hit telop image shown in FIG. 66-4 and display the hit telop image. It is determined whether there is a hit telop image for which an erasing effect is to be started, based on the elapsed time from.

  If it is determined in step 63SHS8 that there is a target hit telop image for which an erase effect is to be started (step 63SHS8; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 starts an erase effect for the target hit telop image. (Step 63SHS9).

  After executing the process of step 63SHS9, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether there is a hit telop image for which the erase effect is not being executed (step 63SHS10).

  When it is determined in step 63SHS10 that there is a hit telop image that is not being erased (step 63SHS10; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 changes the layer stacking order (step 63SHS11). In the process of step 63SHS11, the CPU 120 for effect control moves the layer on which the telop image for hitting for which the erase effect is started is displayed to the back side of the layer having a higher priority than this layer according to the setting of the display priority. Let

  If it is determined in step 63SHS8 that there is no target telop image for starting the deletion effect (step 63SHS8; No), there is no hit telop image for which the deletion effect is not being executed in step 63SHS10. If determined (step 63SHS10; No), or after executing the process of step 63SHS11, the CPU 120 for effect control ends the effect process during the battle.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes such an effect process during battle for each timer interruption, so that a plurality of hit telop images are displayed, and the display result is a “big hit” depending on the effect mode. At the same time, an effect during the battle is executed that suggests the development reliability that develops into Super Reach A. Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the during-battle effect and executes the post-battle effect in response to the fact that all the hit telop images displayed in the during-battle effect process are deleted after the operation valid period ends. .

(Example of directing operation during the battle)
FIG. 66-8 to FIG. 66-14 are diagrams illustrating an example of an effect operation of effects during the battle. In FIG. 66-8 to FIG. 66-14, grid lines indicating coordinates at which the hit telop image can be displayed are illustrated for easy understanding of the display position of the hit telop image. Such grid lines are not displayed when the medium performance is executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays a button image 63SHG1 indicating the push button 31B during the effective operation period of the effect during the battle, thereby performing a promotion notification that prompts the player to press the push button 31B. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the meter image 63SHG2 together with the button image 63SHG1, and changes the display mode of the meter image 63SHG2 with the passage of time, so that the remaining time from the start of the operation effective period to the end thereof Is notified so that the player can recognize.

  In the effect during battle, the effect control CPU 120 displays the HP image 63SHG3 indicating the monster's HP (hit point) together with the monster image 63SHSM indicating the monster. The effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the HP image 63SHG3 in accordance with the display of the hit telop image, thereby notifying the player that the HP of the monster is recognizable.

  Here, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-5 in which the display result is “big hit” without developing into super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 causes the HP image 63SHG3 to be zero so that the monster's HP is finally zero. The display mode of is changed. According to such a configuration, when the HP of the monster finally becomes zero, it is possible to notify the player that the display result is “big hit”.

  On the other hand, when the variation pattern PA2-5 does not develop into super reach A and the display result is “losing”, or when the variation pattern PA3-4 or variation pattern PB3-4 develops into super reach A, The effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the HP image 63SHG3 so that the monster's HP does not eventually become zero. According to such a configuration, even if the monster's HP does not finally become zero, the player can be expected to develop into super reach A.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 varies the degree of change in the display mode of the HP image 63SHG3 according to the type of the displayed hit telop image. For example, when displaying the “MISS” hit telop image 63SHTA, the effect control CPU 120 does not change the display mode of the HP image 63SHG3. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!”, The hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!!!”, or the hit telop image 63SHTD of “EXCELLENT !!!!”. Changes the display mode of the HP image 63SHG3. At that time, the CPU 120 for the effect control greatly reduces the HP of the monster when displaying the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” compared to displaying the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!”. Thus, the display mode of the HP image 63SHG3 is changed. In addition, when the display control CPU 120 displays the “EXCELLENT !!!!” hit telop image 63 SHTD, the monster HP is larger than when the “GREAT !!!!” hit telop image 63 SHTC is displayed. The display mode of the HP image 63SHG3 is changed so as to decrease. According to such a configuration, as the number of hit telop images with high hit reliability is increased, the monster's HP eventually becomes zero and the expectation that the display result will be “hit”. Can be improved.

  First, description will be made regarding an example of the effect operation of the effect during the battle shown in FIG. 66-8. A valid operation is detected, and in step 63SHS5 in the effect processing during battle shown in FIG. 66-5, the type of the hit telop image is determined to be the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!”, And the process of step 63SHS6 is performed. When the display position is determined at the coordinates (X3, Y5), the effect control CPU 120 generates a new layer in the process of step 63SHS7, and the coordinates (X3, Y5) in the new layer are the center. HIT! "Hit telop image 63SHTB is displayed.

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 66-8 (A), the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Is displayed around the coordinates (X3, Y5) in the display area where the monster's body is displayed. The

  Then, valid operations are continuously detected again, and the hit telop image 63SHTC whose type is “GREAT !!” is determined in step 63SHS5 of the mid-battle effect process shown in FIG. 66-5. When the display position is determined as the coordinates (X5, Y6) in the process of step 63SHS6, the effect control CPU 120 generates a new layer in the process of step 63SHS7, and the coordinates (X5, X5) in the new layer are generated. A hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” is displayed centering on Y6). At this time, if the deletion effect for the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Is not executed, the priority of the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” is the priority of the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!”. Higher than. Therefore, the production control CPU 120 generates a new layer on the front side of the layer of the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!”, And displays the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” on the new layer.

  In this way, as shown in FIG. 66-8 (B), centering on the coordinates (X5, Y6) in the display area where the monster's torso is displayed, the front of the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” On the side, the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” is displayed superimposed.

  According to such a configuration, when a certain hit telop image is displayed earlier in time, the hit telop image having a higher hit reliability than the hit telop image is displayed later in time. In this case, if these hit telop images overlap each other, the hit telop image having a high jackpot reliability is displayed on the front side, so that the visibility of the hit telop image having a high jackpot reliability is not hindered. It is possible to increase the impression of the hit telop image having a high jackpot reliability, and to provide a more effective effect during battle.

  Next, description will be made regarding an example of the effect operation of the mid-battle effect shown in FIG. 66-9. A valid operation is detected, and the type of the hit telop image 63SHTC with “GREAT !!” is determined in the process of step 63SHS5 in the mid-battle effect process shown in FIG. 66-5, and in step 63SHS6. When the display position is determined to be the coordinates (X5, Y6) in the process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a new layer in the process of step 63SHS7, and the coordinates (X5, Y6) in the new layer are the center. A hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” is displayed.

  In this way, as shown in FIG. 66-9 (A), the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” is displayed around the coordinates (X5, Y6) in the display area where the monster's body is displayed. Is done.

  Then, valid operations are continuously detected again, and the type of hit telop image 63SHTB is determined as the hit telop image type “HIT!” In the process of step 63SHS5 in the effect process during battle shown in FIG. 66-5. When the display position is determined to be the coordinates (X2, Y7) in the process of step 63SHS6, the effect control CPU 120 generates a new layer in the process of step 63SHS7, and coordinates (X2, Y7) in the new layer. ), The hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Is displayed. At this time, if the deletion effect is not executed for the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!”, the priority of the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Is the priority of the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!!!”. Lower than priority. Therefore, the production control CPU 120 generates a new layer on the back side of the layer of the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT!”, And displays the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” On the new layer.

  In this way, as shown in FIG. 66-9 (B), centering on the coordinates (X2, Y7) in the display area where the monster's torso is displayed, more than the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” On the back side, a hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Is superimposed and displayed.

  According to such a configuration, when a certain hit telop image is displayed earlier in time, the hit telop image having a lower hit reliability than the hit telop image is displayed later in time. In this case, if these hit telop images overlap each other, the hit telop image having a high jackpot reliability is displayed on the front side, so that the visibility of the hit telop image having a high jackpot reliability is not hindered. It is possible to increase the impression of the hit telop image having a high jackpot reliability, and to provide a more effective effect during battle.

  Next, a description will be given of an example of the production operation of the effect during the battle shown in FIG. 66-10. A valid operation is detected, and the type of the hit telop image 63SHTC with “GREAT !!” is determined in the process of step 63SHS5 in the mid-battle effect process shown in FIG. 66-5, and in step 63SHS6. When the display position is determined to be the coordinates (X5, Y6) in the process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a new layer in the process of step 63SHS7, and the coordinates (X5, Y6) in the new layer are the center. A hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” is displayed.

  In this way, as shown in FIG. 66-10 (A), the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” is displayed around the coordinates (X5, Y6) in the display area where the monster's body is displayed. Is done.

  Then, valid operations are continuously detected again, and the type of hit telop image 63SHTB is determined as the hit telop image type “HIT!” In the process of step 63SHS5 in the effect process during battle shown in FIG. 66-5. When the display position is determined as the coordinates (X21, Y21) in the process of step 63SHS6, the effect control CPU 120 generates a new layer in the process of step 63SHS7, and coordinates (X21, Y21) in the new layer. ), The hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Is displayed. At this time, if the deletion effect is not executed for the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!”, the priority of the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Is the priority of the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!!!”. Lower than priority. Therefore, the production control CPU 120 generates a new layer on the back side of the layer of the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT!”, And displays the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” On the new layer.

  In this way, as shown in FIG. 66-10 (B), centering on the coordinates (X21, Y21) in the display area where the left wing of the monster is displayed, than the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” On the back side, a hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Is superimposed and displayed.

  According to such a configuration, when displaying a plurality of types of hit telop images having different jackpot reliability, when these hit telop images overlap each other, the characters displayed in any of the hit telop images Even if the column is also recognizable, the hit telop image with a high jackpot reliability is displayed on the front side, so the impression of the hit telop image with a high jackpot reliability is enhanced, and a more effective effect during battle be able to.

  Next, an example of the production operation of the effect during the battle shown in FIG. 66-11 will be described. A valid operation is detected, and the type of the hit telop image 63SHTC with “GREAT !!” is determined in the process of step 63SHS5 in the mid-battle effect process shown in FIG. 66-5, and in step 63SHS6. When the display position is determined to be the coordinates (X5, Y6) in the process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a new layer in the process of step 63SHS7, and the coordinates (X5, Y6) in the new layer are the center. A hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” is displayed.

  In this way, as shown in FIG. 66-11 (A), the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” is displayed around the coordinates (X5, Y6) in the display area where the monster's body is displayed. Is done.

  Then, valid operations are continuously detected again, and the type of hit telop image 63SHTB is determined as the hit telop image type “HIT!” In the process of step 63SHS5 in the effect process during battle shown in FIG. 66-5. When the display position is determined to be the coordinates (X2, Y7) in the process of step 63SHS6, the effect control CPU 120 generates a new layer in the process of step 63SHS7, and coordinates (X2, Y7) in the new layer. ), The hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Is displayed. At this time, if the deletion effect for the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” has been executed, the priority of the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Is the priority of the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!”. Higher than priority. Therefore, the production control CPU 120 generates a new layer on the front side of the layer of the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT!”, And displays the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” On the new layer.

  In this way, as shown in FIG. 66-11 (B), centering on the coordinates (X2, Y7) in the display area where the monster's torso is displayed, the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” On the front side, a hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Is superimposed and displayed.

  According to such a configuration, when displaying a plurality of types of hit telop images having different jackpot reliability, when an erasing effect is executed on a hit telop image having a high jackpot reliability, the jackpot reliability is increased. Since the low hit telop image is displayed superimposed on the front side, it is possible to prevent an excessive restriction on the hit telop image having a low jackpot reliability.

  Next, a description will be given of an example of the production operation of the effect during the battle shown in FIG. 66-12. A valid operation is detected, and the type of the hit telop image 63SHTC with “GREAT !!” is determined in the process of step 63SHS5 in the mid-battle effect process shown in FIG. 66-5, and in step 63SHS6. When the display position is determined to be the coordinates (X5, Y4) in the process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a new layer in the process of step 63SHS7, and the coordinates (X5, Y4) in the new layer are the center. A hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” is displayed.

  In this way, as shown in FIG. 66-12 (A), the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” is displayed around the coordinates (X5, Y4) in the display area where the monster's body is displayed. Is done. Also, in FIG. 66-12 (A), the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Is displayed around the coordinates (X2, Y6) in the display area where the monster's body is displayed.

  Then, valid operations are continuously detected again, and the hit telop image 63SHTD with the type of the hit telop image “EXCELLENT !!!” is obtained in the process of step 63SHS5 in the battle effect processing shown in FIG. 66-5. If the display position is determined to be the coordinates (X5, Y5) in the process of step 63SHS6, the effect control CPU 120 generates a new layer in the process of step 63SHS7, and coordinates (X5) in the new layer. , Y5), a hit telop image 63SHTD of “EXCELLENT !!!” is displayed. At this time, the priority of the hit telop image 63SHTD of “EXCELLENT !!!” is higher than the priority of the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” And the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!!”. Therefore, the production control CPU 120 generates a new layer in front of the layer of the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” And the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!!!”, and “EXCELLENT! ! ”Is displayed as a hit telop image 63SHTD.

  In this way, as shown in FIG. 66-12 (B), the hit telop image 63SHTB, “GREAT” of “HIT!” Is centered on the coordinates (X5, Y5) in the display area where the monster's body is displayed. A hit telop image 63SHTD of “EXCELLENT !!!!!” is superimposed and displayed in front of the hit telop image 63SHTC of “!”.

  According to such a configuration, when displaying three or more types of hit telop images having different jackpot reliability, when these hit telop images overlap each other, the type of hit telop having the highest jackpot reliability is displayed. Since the image is displayed superimposed on the front side of the other two or more types of hit telop images, variations in the appearance of the hit telop image during the battle effect are enriched, and the interest can be further improved. it can.

  Next, description will be made regarding an example of the effect operation of the mid-battle effect shown in FIG. 66-13. A valid operation is detected, and the hit telop image 63SHTC1 of the type of the hit telop image “GREAT !!” is determined in the process of step 63SHS5 in the effect processing during battle shown in FIG. 66-5, and the process of step 63SHS6 is performed. When the display position is determined at the coordinates (X5, Y6), the effect control CPU 120 generates a new layer in the process of step 63SHS7, and the coordinates (X5, Y6) in the new layer are set as the center. The hit telop image 63SHTC1 of “GREAT !!” is displayed.

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 66-13 (A), the hit telop image 63SHTC1 of “GREAT !!” is displayed around the coordinates (X5, Y6) in the display area where the monster's body is displayed. Is done.

  Then, valid operations are continuously detected again, and the hit telop image 63SHTC2 whose type is “GREAT !!” is determined in step 63SHS5 in the mid-battle effect process shown in FIG. 66-5. When the display position is determined as the coordinates (X4, Y7) in the process of step 63SHS6, the effect control CPU 120 generates a new layer in the process of step 63SHS7, and the coordinates (X4, X4) in the new layer are generated. A hit telop image 63SHTC2 of “GREAT !!” is displayed centering on Y7). At this time, if the deletion effect is not executed for the hit telop image 63SHTC1 of “GREAT !!!” displayed earlier in time, the hit telop of “GREAT !!!” displayed later in time is displayed. The priority of the image 63SHTC2 is higher than the hit telop image 63SHTC1 of “GREAT !!” displayed earlier. Therefore, the production control CPU 120 generates a new layer on the front side of the layer of the hit telop image 63SHTC1 of “GREAT !!!!” displayed earlier, and “GREAT! ! "Is displayed for the hit telop image 63SHTC2.

  In this way, as shown in FIG. 66-13 (B), the hit “GREAT !!” displayed earlier is centered on the coordinates (X4, Y7) in the display area where the monster's body is displayed. On the front side of the telop image 63SHTC1, the hit telop image 63SHTC2 of “GREAT !!” displayed later is displayed in a superimposed manner.

  According to such a configuration, when displaying a plurality of hit telop images of the same type of jackpot reliability, when these hit telop images overlap each other, the hit telop displayed later in time Since the image is displayed on the front side, it is possible to prevent unnecessary restriction.

  Next, description will be made regarding an example of the effect operation of the effect during the battle shown in FIG. 66-14. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 detects how many times in the operation effective period the operation determined to be an effective operation every time an effective operation on the push button 31B is detected in the operation effective period of the effect during the battle. And the type of hit telop image determined in accordance with whether the operation is the movement pattern or the variation pattern.

  In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 66-14 (A) and 66-14 (B), eight hit telop images corresponding to eight effective operations are displayed.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 66-14A, two “MISS” hit telop images 63SHTA1, a hit telop image 63SHTA2, two “HIT!” Hit telop images 63SHTB1, and a hit telop image are displayed. 73SHTB2, two "GREAT !!!!" hit telop images 63SHTC1, hit telop image 63SHTC2, two "EXCELLENT !!!!" hit telop images 63SHTD1, and hit telop image 63SHTD2 are displayed. .

  On the other hand, in the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 66-14 (B), the four “MISS” hit telop images 63SHTA1 to the hit telop images 63SHTA4, the two “HIT!” Hit telop images 63SHTB1, and the hit use A telop image 73SHTB2, two “GREAT !!” hit telop images 63SHTC1, and a hit telop image 63SHTC2 are displayed.

  In this way, the hit operation telop image having a high hit reliability is displayed more in the effect operation example shown in FIG. 66-14 (A) than in the effect operation example shown in FIG. 66-14 (B). . Therefore, it can be said that the situation of the effect operation example shown in FIG. 66-14 (A) suggests that the big hit reliability is higher than the situation of the effect operation example shown in FIG. 66-14 (B).

  66-14 (A) and (B), the effect operation example displayed in front of the “MISS” hit telop image 63SHTA1 displayed earlier in time is displayed later in time. The “MISS” hit telop image 63SHTA2 is displayed in an overlapping manner.

  As described above, not only the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 66-13 but also other types of hit telop images, when displaying a plurality of hit telop images of the same type of hit success reliability, When the hit telop images overlap each other, the hit telop images displayed later in time are displayed on the front side.

  Further, in the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 66-14 (A), the big hit reliability is higher than the “MISS” hit telop image on the front side of the “MISS” hit telop image 63SHTA1 and the hit telop image 63SHTA2. The hit telop image 63SHTC2 having a high “GREAT !!” is displayed in an overlapping manner. On the other hand, in the effect operation example shown in FIG. 66-14 (B), the big hit reliability is higher than the “MISS” hit telop image and in front of the “MISS” hit telop image 63SHTA2 and the hit telop image 63SHTA3. The hit telop image 63SHTB2 having a high “HIT!” Is displayed redundantly.

  In this way, not only the example of the rendering operation shown in FIG. 66-12, even when other types of hit telop images are displayed, when displaying three or more types of hit telop images having different jackpot reliability, When the hit telop images overlap with each other, the type of hit telop image having the highest jackpot reliability is displayed superimposed on the front side of the other two or more types of hit telop images.

  Also, in the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 66-14 (A), “EXCELLENT !!!!!!” is hit in front of the “EXCELLENT !!!” hit telop image 63SHTD1 in which the erase effect is being executed. The hit telop image 63SHTB2 of “HIT!”, Which has a lower hit reliability than the telop image but is not executed, is displayed in an overlapping manner. On the other hand, in the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 66-14 (B), the hit telop image of “GREAT !!!” is placed in front of the hit telop image 63SHTC1 of “GREAT! The hit telop image 63SHTA4 of “MISS”, which is lower in jackpot reliability but not erased, is displayed in an overlapping manner.

  In this way, not only the example of the rendering operation shown in FIG. 66-11, even when other types of hit telop images are displayed, when displaying a plurality of types of hit telop images with different hit hit reliability, the jackpot reliability When an erasing effect is executed for a hit telop image with a high hit level, a hit telop image with a low jackpot reliability is displayed superimposed on the front side.

  Further, in the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 66-14 (A), “EXCELLENT having a higher hit reliability than the hit telop image of“ HIT! ”Is located in front of the hit telop image 63SHTB2 of“ HIT! ”. "!!!!" hit telop image 63SHTD2 is displayed in duplicate.

  As described above, not only the example of the rendering operation shown in FIGS. 66-8 to 66-10, but also other types of hit telop images, a plurality of types of hit telop images having different big hit reliability are displayed. In this case, when these hit telop images overlap each other, the hit telop image having a high jackpot reliability is displayed on the front side.

  In the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 66-14 (A), the hit telop image 63SHTB1 of “HIT!” On which the delete effect is being executed is located in front of the hit telop image of “HIT!”. The hit telop image 63SHTC1 of “GREAT !!!!”, which has a high hit reliability and a deletion effect, is displayed in an overlapping manner. On the other hand, in the effect operation example shown in FIG. 66-14 (B), the big hit reliability is higher than the hit telop image of “MISS” in front of the “MISS” hit telop image 63SHTA1 in which the delete effect is executed. The hit telop image 63SHTB1 of “HIT!” Which is executed at a high level and has an erase effect is displayed in an overlapping manner.

  In this way, when displaying a plurality of types of hit telop images with different hit-hits reliability, if these hit telop images overlap each other, if an erasing effect for these hit telop images is executed, A hit telop image with high hit reliability is displayed on the front side.

  In the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 66-14 (B), the hit telop image 63SHTC2 of “GREAT !!” is displayed without overlapping with any other hit telop image.

  Thus, when displaying a plurality of hit telop images, the hit telop images are not necessarily displayed in an overlapping manner.

(Variation 1 of the characteristic portion 63SH)
In the above embodiment, the display position of the hit telop image is randomly determined by lottery regardless of the type of hit telop image. In other words, the display position of the suggestion image is determined by lottery regardless of the type of suggestion image. Instead of or in addition to such a mode, the display position of the suggestion image can be determined by lottery, and a specific type of suggestion image can be determined by a specific display mode regardless of the lottery. May be displayed. For example, the display control CPU 120 randomly determines the display positions of the “MISS” hit telop image 63 SHTA, the “HIT!” Hit telop image 63 SHTB, and the “GREAT !!!!” hit telop image 63 SHTC. The “EXCELLENT !!!!” hit telop image 63SHTD is displayed over the entire display area, displayed in the display area corresponding to the center of the monster image, and displayed so as to sequentially move the display areas. Is displayed in a specific display mode. According to such an aspect, the suggestion effect can be further increased. In addition, if the suggestion image that suggests that the degree of advantage that is advantageous to the player is large is a specific type of suggestion image, the impression of the specific type of suggestion image is increased, and the suggestion image is made more effective. Can do.

(Variation 2 of the characteristic portion 63SH)
In the above embodiment, any type of hit telop image is not always advantageous to the player. That is, regardless of whether it is advantageous to the player, any kind of suggestion image can be displayed. In place of such a mode or in addition to such a mode, a specific type of suggestion image may be displayed when it is advantageous to the player. For example, when the display results are the fluctuation pattern PB2-5 and the fluctuation pattern PB3-4 with the display result “big hit”, the effect control CPU 120 can display the hit telop image in which the character string “PERFECT” is displayed. To do. According to such an aspect, it can be definitely notified that it is advantageous for the player. In addition, if it is advantageous for the player, it is possible to display a specific type of suggestion image with a low probability, and if it is a so-called premier effect, attention will be given to whether a specific type of suggestion image is displayed. And the interest when a specific type of suggestion image is displayed can be greatly enhanced. In addition, when it is advantageous for the player, it is determined in advance whether or not to display a specific type of suggestion image. When a specific type of suggestion image is displayed, If the suggestion image that suggests that the degree of advantage that is advantageous to the player is low is displayed, the suggestion that suggests that the degree of advantage that is advantageous to the player is low when it is not advantageous to the player Even in a situation where an image is easily displayed, it is possible to enhance the expectation that a specific type of suggestion image is displayed.

(Modification 3 of the characteristic portion 63SH)
In the embodiment described above, when the last effective operation is detected, regardless of whether the display result is “big hit” or develops to Super Reach A, “EXCELLENT !!!” The hit telop image 63SHTD is displayed. In other words, regardless of whether it is advantageous to the player, a specific type of suggestion image is displayed when the number of times the player's motion is detected reaches a specific number. Instead of, or in addition to, such a mode, when the number of times that the player's action has been detected reaches a specific number, depending on whether it is advantageous to the player, a specific type of The ratio of displaying the suggestion image may be varied. For example, when the display result is “big hit”, the hit telop image 63SHTD of “EXCELLENT !!!” is detected when the last valid operation is detected, rather than when the display result is “lost”. Increase the rate at which appears. In the case of developing to super reach A, the hit telop image 63SHTD of “EXCELLENT !!!!” is displayed when the last effective operation is detected, compared to the case of not developing to super reach A. Increase the ratio. According to such an aspect, it is possible to increase attention to the type of suggestion image displayed when the number of times that the player's movement is detected reaches a specific number.

(Variation 4 of the characteristic portion 63SH)
In the above embodiment, which type of hit telop image is to be displayed at which display position regardless of whether the display result is “big hit” or develops into Super Reach A. , Randomly determined by lottery. That is, regardless of whether it is advantageous to the player, which type of suggestion image is displayed at which display position is determined by lottery. Instead of or in addition to such an aspect, depending on whether it is advantageous for the player, the ratio at which a specific type of suggestion image is displayed at a specific display position may be varied. Good. For example, when the display result is “big hit”, the ratio that the telop image for hit with higher hit reliability is displayed in the display area where the monster ’s body is displayed than when the display result is “losing” To increase. Further, in the case of developing to super reach A, the rate at which the hit telop image with high hit reliability is displayed in the display area where the monster's body is displayed is higher than in the case of not developing to super reach A. According to such an aspect, attention to the type of suggestion image displayed at a specific display position can be increased.

(Variation 5 of the feature 63SH)
In the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the HP image 63SHG3 is changed so that the amount by which the HP of the monster is reduced differs depending on the type of the displayed hit telop image. Then, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-5 in which the display result is “big hit” without developing to super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 causes the HP image 63SHG3 to be zero so that the monster's HP is finally zero. The display mode is changed. On the other hand, when the variation pattern PA2-5 does not develop into super reach A and the display result is “losing”, or when the variation pattern PA3-4 or variation pattern PB3-4 develops into super reach A, The effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the HP image 63SHG3 so that the monster's HP does not eventually become zero. That is, when the special image means that can execute the special effect that changes the aspect of the special image during execution of the suggestion effect and the aspect of the special image changes depending on which type of the suggestion image is displayed It is advantageous for the player when the change modes of the images are different and the mode of the specific image is changed to the specific mode. In place of such a mode, or in addition to such a mode, a special rendering unit capable of executing a special rendering that changes the mode of the special image during execution of the suggestion rendering is provided. Depending on whether or not is displayed, the change mode when the mode of the special image changes is different, and when the mode of the special image changes to the specific mode, it may be advantageous for the player. For example, when the display result is “big hit”, the rate at which the hit telop image is displayed in the display area where the monster body is displayed is higher than when the display result is “losing”. In the case of developing to super reach A, the rate at which the hit telop image is displayed in the display area where the monster's body is displayed is higher than in the case of not developing to super reach A. When the hit telop image is displayed in the display area where the monster's body is displayed, the HP of the monster is higher than when the hit telop image is displayed in the display area where the monster wing is displayed. The display mode of the HP image 63SHG3 is changed so that the amount of decrease increases. According to such an aspect, it is possible to increase attention as to which display position the suggestion image is displayed.

(Modification 6 of the characteristic portion 63SH)
In the above embodiment, in a series of battle effects in which a battle with a monster is performed, a plurality of display positions at which the hit telop image can be displayed are set corresponding to the display area in which the monster image is displayed. That is, an effect of displaying a predetermined image can be executed as the predetermined effect, and the suggestion image is displayed at a position corresponding to the display area where the predetermined image is displayed. In place of or in addition to such an aspect, as a predetermined effect, an effect of displaying any one of a plurality of types of predetermined images can be executed, and any type of the predetermined image is displayed. The position where the suggestion image can be displayed may be different depending on whether the suggestion image is displayed. For example, in the case of performing an effect of displaying either a dragon image or a giant image as a battle effect, when displaying a dragon image, a display area in which the dragon's body is displayed The suggestion image can be displayed in the display area where the wings of the dragon are displayed. On the other hand, when an image of a giant is displayed, a suggestion image can be displayed in a display area where the upper body of the giant is displayed and a display area where the lower body of the giant is displayed. According to such an aspect, no matter what kind of predetermined image is displayed, the suggestion image can be displayed at a position corresponding to the display area where the predetermined image is displayed.

(Variation 7 of the characteristic portion 63SH)
In the above embodiment, in a series of battle effects in which a battle with a monster is performed, a plurality of display positions at which the hit telop image can be displayed are set corresponding to the display area in which the monster image is displayed. That is, an effect of displaying a predetermined image can be executed as the predetermined effect, and the suggestion image is displayed at a position corresponding to the display area where the predetermined image is displayed. In place of or in addition to such an aspect, as a predetermined effect, an effect of displaying any one of a plurality of types of predetermined images can be executed, and any type of the predetermined image is displayed. Regardless of whether or not it is done, a position where the suggestion image can be displayed may be set as a common position. For example, in the case of performing an effect of displaying either a dragon image or a giant image as a battle effect, in the case of displaying a dragon image, in the display area where the dragon body is displayed The suggestion image can be displayed. On the other hand, when the giant's upper body is displayed in the same display area as the display area where the dragon's body is displayed, the suggested image is displayed in the display area where the upper body of the giant is displayed. It can be displayed. According to such an aspect, regardless of which type of predetermined image is displayed, not only the suggestion image can be displayed at a position corresponding to the display area where the predetermined image is displayed, but also the display position of the suggestion image It is possible to reduce the load and the data capacity related to the process for determining.

(Variation 8 of the characteristic portion 63SH)
In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of hit telop images can be displayed in a series of battle effects in which a battle with a monster is performed. That is, as the predetermined effect, an effect of displaying a predetermined image can be executed, and a plurality of types of suggestion images can be displayed. In place of or in addition to such an aspect, as a predetermined effect, an effect of displaying any one of a plurality of types of predetermined images can be executed, and any type of the predetermined image is displayed. Depending on whether or not, at least some of the types of suggestion images that can be displayed may be different. For example, in the case of performing an effect of displaying either a dragon image or a giant image as a battle effect, when displaying a dragon image, the “MISS” hit telop image, It is possible to display a hit telop image of “HIT!”, A hit telop image of “GREAT !!”, and a hit telop image of “EXCELLENT !!!!”. On the other hand, when displaying a giant image, a hit telop image of “MISS”, a hit telop image displaying a character string “who is!”, And “what to do to the giant!” It is possible to display a hit telop image in which the character string “” is displayed and a hit telop image in which the character string “Do you want to become a giant?” Is displayed. According to such an aspect, the suggestion effect can be further increased.

(Variation 9 of the characteristic portion 63SH)
In the above embodiment, the hit telop image can be displayed in response to the detection of the player's operation on the push button 31B. That is, the suggestion image can be displayed in response to the detection of the player's action. Instead of or in addition to such a mode, the suggestion image may be displayed according to a predetermined display timing. For example, by specifying the timing control pattern of the suggestion effect at which timing to display the hit telop image, and executing the suggestion effect according to the effect control pattern, the predetermined control specified by the effect control pattern is performed. The suggestion image is displayed according to the display timing. According to such an aspect, it can be set as a more effective suggestion effect also about the suggestion effect which does not accompany a player's operation.

(Modification 10 of the feature 63SH)
In the above-described embodiment, when a certain hit telop image and a hit telop image having a higher hit reliability than the hit telop image are displayed at positions where they can overlap each other, a hit telop having a lower hit hit reliability is displayed. A hit telop image with a high expectation degree of jackpot is displayed in duplicate on the front side of the image. That is, when the first suggestion image and the second suggestion image having a higher degree of advantage suggested than the first suggestion image are displayed at positions that can be superimposed on each other, the second suggestion image is displayed rather than the first suggestion image. Displayed with priority. As another embodiment related to this, when a certain hit telop image and a hit telop image having a higher hit reliability than the hit telop image are displayed at positions where they can overlap each other, the big hit reliability May display a hit telop image with a high hit level, but not display a hit telop image with a low jackpot reliability.

(Variation 11 of the characteristic portion 63SH)
In the above-described embodiment, when the hit telop image is erased, an erase effect is executed in which the size of the hit telop image is gradually reduced and then erased. That is, when erasing the suggestion image, it is possible to execute an erase effect that changes the mode of the suggestion image. As another embodiment related to this, when deleting the hit telop image, it may be possible to execute an erasing effect of erasing after gradually increasing the transparency of the hit telop image.

(Modification 12 of the characteristic portion 63SH)
In the above embodiment, the hit telop image of the type determined by the lottery is displayed in response to the detection of the player's operation on the push button 31B. That is, it is possible to display the type of suggestion image determined by the lottery in response to the detection of the player's action. As another embodiment related to this, a suggestion image of the type determined by the lottery is displayed in response to detection of various actions of the player including the player's operation on the stick controller 31A. It may be possible.

(Modification 13 of the feature 63SH)
In the above embodiment, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the hit telop image was displayed, an erasing effect for erasing the hit telop image is executed. That is, an erasing effect for erasing the predetermined image is executed in response to the elapse of a predetermined time after displaying the suggestion image. As another embodiment related to this, instead of such an aspect, or in addition to such an aspect, an erasing effect for erasing a predetermined image can be executed in accordance with an aspect of the predetermined effect. Also good. For example, not only attacking a monster but also an effect attacked by a monster can be executed as an effect during the battle, and the telop image for hitting is deleted in response to the effect being attacked by the monster Execute the erase effect. In that case, all the displayed hit telop images may be erased all at once, or an animation that gradually reduces the size of all displayed hit telop images as in the above embodiment. Display may be performed. When performing an animation display that gradually reduces the size of all displayed hit telop images, the time is enough to give the impression of being erased all at once according to the effects attacked by the monsters. Execute animation display with. In addition, for example, the display result is “big hit”, such that the big hit reliability that the display result is “big hit”, the lower the development reliability that develops to Super Reach A, the higher the execution frequency of the production attacked by the monster. The execution frequency of the production attacked by the monster may be different according to the big hit reliability and the development reliability developed into Super Reach A. In addition, the execution frequency of the production attacked by the monster may be determined at random, regardless of the big hit reliability at which the display result is “big hit” and the development reliability developed into Super Reach A. In the case of such an aspect, even if an effect attacked by a monster is executed, an effect as if the attack from the monster was a “miss” is executed, and an erasure effect for deleting the hit telop image is provided. It may not be executed. In that case, for example, the higher the reliability of the jackpot reliability that the display result is “big hit”, the higher the development reliability that develops to Super Reach A, the higher the execution frequency of the performance as if the attack from the monster was “miss”. As described above, the execution frequency of the production attacked by the monster may be different according to the big hit reliability at which the display result is “big hit” and the development reliability developed into the super reach A. According to such an aspect, the interest of a predetermined effect can be improved significantly.

(Modification 14 of the feature 63SH)
In relation to the feature section 63SH, a series of jackpot performances for notifying the jackpot gaming state, including effects for notifying the number of rounds, promotion effects for suggesting whether the value of the jackpot gaming state is improved, By displaying a plurality of prize ball suggestion images during execution and suggesting the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the remaining rounds, it is possible to execute a promotion effect that suggests whether the value of the jackpot gaming state is improved, Depending on the type of prize ball suggestion image, the number of suggested prize balls differs, and a plurality of different types of prize ball suggestion images can be displayed at positions where they can be superimposed on each other, and ten prize balls can be obtained. The award-ball suggestion image displaying the character string “+10” that indicates that the character string is displayed, and the character string “+50” that indicates that it is possible to obtain 50 prize balls are displayed. Prize-ball suggestion images can be superimposed on each other When displayed in a position, on the front side of the prize balls suggestion image of "+ 10", it may be displayed prize balls suggestion image of "+ 50". Here, the series of big hit effects is an example of “a series of predetermined effects” in the present invention. The winning ball suggestion image is an example of the “suggestion image” in the present invention. The number of prize balls that can be obtained in the remaining rounds is an example of the “degree of advantage that is advantageous to the player” in the present invention. The promotion effect is an example of the “suggestion effect” in the present invention. The prize ball suggestion image of “+10” is an example of the “first suggestion image” in the present invention. The prize ball suggestion image of “+50” is an example of the “second suggestion image” in the present invention. In addition, displaying the positive ball suggestion image of “+50” in front of the positive ball suggestion image of “+10” preferentially displays the second suggestion image over the “first suggestion image” in the present invention. Is an example.

  In such an embodiment, when deleting the prize-ball suggesting image, it is possible to execute an erasing effect in which the size of the prize-ball suggesting image is gradually reduced and then deleted. Note that erasing after gradually reducing the size of the prize-ball suggestion image is an example of “changing the mode of the suggestion image” in the present invention.

  Further, in such an embodiment, it is suggested that it is possible to obtain 70 prize balls that overlap both the “+10” prize ball suggestion image and the “+50” prize ball suggestion image. It is possible to display a prize ball suggestion image in which a character string “+70” is displayed. The prize ball suggestion image “+70” is an example of the “third suggestion image” in the present invention.

  Further, in such an embodiment, the display of the effect image and the output of the sound effect may be executable in response to the display of the prize ball suggestion image. The display of the effect image and the output of the sound effect are examples of the “specific effect” in the present invention.

  In such an embodiment, the display period until the prize ball suggestion image is erased may be different depending on the type of the prize ball suggestion image.

  Further, in such an embodiment, a prize ball suggestion image of a type determined by lottery may be displayed in response to detection of a player's operation on the push button 31B. The player's operation on the push button 31B is an example of the “player's operation” in the present invention.

(Additional notes regarding the feature 63SH)
(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), and a predetermined presentation that can execute a series of predetermined presentations. Means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control capable of executing a series of battle effects), and executing a suggestion effect that indicates a degree of advantage that is advantageous to the player by displaying a plurality of suggestion images during execution of the predetermined effect. Possible suggestion effect means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control capable of executing a mid-battle effect which displays a plurality of hit telop images and suggests a big hit reliability during execution of the battle effect), and the suggested image Depending on the type of the image, the suggested degree of advantage differs (for example, the suggested jackpot reliability varies depending on the type of the hit telop image), and a plurality of the suggested images of different types are mutually connected. Can be displayed at positions that can be superimposed on each other (for example, a plurality of hit telop images of different types can be displayed at positions that can overlap each other), and the first suggestion image and the first suggestion image When the second suggestion image having a large degree of advantage suggested is displayed at a position where it can be superimposed on the second suggestion image, the second suggestion image is displayed with priority over the first suggestion image (for example, “HIT!” When the hit telop image 63SHTB and the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT!” Having a higher hit reliability than the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Are displayed at positions that can overlap each other, “HIT! “!” Is displayed in front of the hit telop image 63SHTB of “!”, And the telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” is displayed in duplicate.

  According to such a configuration, during the execution of a series of predetermined effects, it is possible to display a plurality of suggestion images and perform an suggestion effect that suggests the degree of advantage that is advantageous to the player, depending on the type of the suggestion image Since the suggested degree of advantage is different, the interest can be further improved. In addition, according to such a configuration, a plurality of different suggestion images can be displayed at positions where they can be superimposed on each other, and the first suggestion image and the first suggestion having a higher degree of advantage than the first suggestion image are displayed. When the second suggestion image is displayed at a position where the two suggestion images can be superimposed on each other, the second suggestion image is preferentially displayed over the first suggestion image, and therefore, the second suggestion has a higher degree of advantage suggested than the first suggestion image. The visibility of the image can be prevented from being disturbed, the impression of the second suggestion image is increased, and a more effective suggestion effect can be obtained.

  (2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, when erasing the suggestion image, erase effect means capable of executing an erase effect that changes the mode of the suggestion image (for example, the size of the hit telop image gradually increases). An effect control CPU 120 that can execute an erasing effect for executing a reduced animation display, and the like, and when the erasing effect for the second suggestion image is being executed, the position is superimposed on the second suggestion image. When displaying the first suggestion image, the first suggestion image may be displayed preferentially over the second suggestion image (for example, an erasing effect is executed on the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!”). The hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” Is displayed at a position overlapping with the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!”. If, on the front side than the hit for the ticker image 63SHTC of "GREAT !!", it can be displayed by overlapping the hit for the ticker image 63SHTB of "HIT!", Etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an excessive restriction on displaying the first suggestion image.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the third suggestion image superimposed on both the first suggestion image and the second suggestion image may be displayed (for example, “HIT! The “EXCELLENT !!!!!!

  According to such a configuration, variations in how the suggested image is seen in the suggestive effect are enriched, and the interest can be further improved.

  (4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) may further include a specific effect unit capable of executing a specific effect in response to the display of the suggestion image (for example, for hitting An effect control CPU 120 that can display an effect image and output a sound effect in response to the display of a telop image).

  According to such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be further increased.

  (5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4), the display period until the suggestion image is erased may be different depending on the type of the suggestion image (for example, a hit telop The display period until the hit telop image is deleted depends on the type of image).

  According to such a configuration, the suggestion image can be erased at a timing according to the type of the suggestion image.

  (6) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (5), a detecting means (for example, a push sensor 35B capable of detecting the player's operation on the push button 31B) capable of detecting the player's operation is provided. In addition, the suggestion image of the type determined by the lottery may be displayed in response to detection of the player's action (for example, in response to detection of the player's operation on the push button 31B). The ability to display the type of hit telop image determined by lottery).

  According to such a configuration, the first image is displayed in the second suggestion image that has a higher degree of advantage suggested than the first suggestion image in an effect that does not know which type of suggestion image is displayed at which timing. Since they are not superimposed, a more effective performance can be executed.

  (7) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (6), when the same type of the suggested images can be superimposed on each other, the suggested image displayed after the previously displayed suggested image is given priority. (For example, when the same type of hit telop images are superimposed on each other, the later displayed hit telop image is superimposed on the front side of the previously displayed hit telop image. Etc.)

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent unnecessary restrictions from being applied when displaying the same type of suggestion image.

(Explanation regarding feature 63SH + feature 31AK)
A gaming machine capable of playing a game as a gaming machine having both the above-described feature part 63SH and the feature part 31AK, and a plurality of predetermined effect means capable of executing a series of predetermined effects, A suggestion effect means capable of displaying a suggestion image and suggesting a degree of advantage that is advantageous to the player, and a title notification means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect in the predetermined effect. A title corresponding to the suggestive effect can be notified when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the predetermined effect including the effect, and the suggested degree of advantage differs depending on the type of the suggested image, and a plurality of suggested images of different types Can be displayed at positions where they can be superimposed on each other, and the first suggestion image and the second suggestion image having a higher degree of advantage suggested than the first suggestion image are displayed at positions where they can be superimposed on each other. When it is possible to the gaming machine, characterized in that than the first suggestion image preferentially displaying a second suggestion images.

  The content described in the embodiment corresponding to the feature portion 63SH and the embodiment corresponding to the feature portion 31AK can be applied to the embodiment of the gaming machine having both the feature portion 63SH and the feature portion 31AK. For example, the CPU 120 for effect control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute a series of battle effects. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the during-battle effect suggesting the big hit reliability by displaying a plurality of hit telop images during execution of the battle effect. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can notify a title corresponding to the effect during the battle effect. Then, the effect control CPU 120 can notify the title corresponding to the effect during the battle when the effect during the battle is started after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the battle effect including the effect during the battle. Also, the big hit reliability varies depending on the type of hit telop image, and the effect control CPU 120 can display a plurality of hit telop images of different types at positions where they can be superimposed on each other. Then, the CPU 120 for effect control includes the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” And the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” having a higher hit reliability than the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!” When displayed at positions that can be superimposed on each other, the hit telop image 63SHTC of “GREAT !!” is displayed superimposed on the front side of the hit telop image 63SHTB of “HIT!”.

  In addition, the contents described in the embodiment corresponding to the feature portion 63SH and the embodiment corresponding to the feature portion 31AK can be applied to the sub-combination of other feature groups of the feature portion 63SH and the feature portion 31AK.

1 Pachinko machine 12 Production control board 120 Production control CPU
250 Movable body 275 LED substrate 601 Motor driving IC
602 LED driving IC
603 Connector 650 Connector 651 Metal fixing portion 800 First effect body 803 Decoration member 820 to 822 Rear LED
844A to 844E Boss 850 Conductive portion 851 Nonconductive portion 900 Second stage P P Pad 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frames 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... winning ball apparatus 6B ... variable winning ball apparatus 7 ... special variable winning ball apparatus 8L, 8R ... speaker 9 ... game effect lamp 10 ... general winning opening 11 ... main board 12 ... effect control board 13 ... voice control board 14 ... lamp control Board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A and 22B ... Start switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Microcomputer for game control 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A specific electronic component having a metal fixing part is mounted at least, and a substrate on which a wiring pattern for electrically connecting each electronic component to be mounted is formed,
The substrate is formed with a component fixing portion for fixing the metal fixing portion with a low-temperature molten metal,
The component fixing portion is electrically connected to one of the wiring patterns,
further,
Predetermined production means capable of executing a series of predetermined productions;
A suggestion effect means capable of executing a suggestion effect that displays a plurality of suggestion images during the execution of the predetermined effect and suggests a degree of advantage that is advantageous to the player;
Depending on the type of the suggestion image, the suggested degree of advantage differs,
A plurality of the suggested images of different types can be displayed at positions where they can be superimposed on each other,
When the first suggestion image and the second suggestion image having a higher degree of advantage suggested than the first suggestion image are displayed at positions that can be superimposed on each other, the second suggestion image is displayed more than the first suggestion image. A gaming machine characterized by preferential display.